Home

Delta Electronics AC Motor Drive VFD-E User's Manual

1. API Mnemonic Operands Function 10 CMP P S S D Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OF x Y M K KnM T C D CMP CMPP 7 steps S amp llalele S sls amp llelel D x Operands S1 Comparison Value 1 S2 Comparison Value 2 D Comparison result D 46 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations 4 2 3 4 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 2 4 Designate device YO and operand D automatically occupies YO Y1 and Y2 When X10 On CMP instruction will be executed and one of YO Y1 and Y2 will be On When X10 Off CMP instruction will not be executed and YO Y1 and Y2 remain their status before X10 Off If the user need to obtain a comparison result with 2 lt and make a series parallel connection between YO Y2 X10 T owe YO IfK10 gt D10 YO On Y1 IfK10 D10 Y1 On Y2 H If K10 D10 Y2 On To clear the compariso
2. Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix Accessories B 11 2 MKE DRB EM B 11 3 MKE EP EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable C CLAMP TWO ira STRAP TWO ires STRAP B 36 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 37 Appendix B Accessories This page intentionally left blank B 38 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and motor maybe damaged If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small it cannot offer the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor user application requirements cannot be met completely Therefore a designer should consider all the conditions including load type load speed load characteristic operation method rated output rated speed power and the change of load capacity The following table lists the factors you need to consider depending on your requirements Related Specificati
3. D 30 0 5 9 Description of the Application D 45 D 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands D 46 0 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive D 58 D 6 Error Code erp tdi bebe a degere as D 65 Appendix E CANopen Function E 1 1 ER E 2 1 1 CANopen Protocol E 2 E 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition E 3 E 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set esee E 3 E 1 4 CANopen Communication E 4 E 1 4 1 NMT Network Management E 4 E 1 4 2 SDO Service Data E 6 E 1 4 3 PDO Process Data E 7 E 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency E 9 E 2 How to Control by CANopen seeee eem E 13 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 1 Introduction The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation In order to retain the warranty coverage the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time Storage conditions are
4. Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Windmill winding Restart free Before the free running motor is 08 04 08 08 machine fan and all running motor completely stopped it can be restarted inertia loads without detection of motor speed The AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed DC Brake before Running Applications Purpose Functions When e g windmills Keep the free If the running direction of the free 08 00 fans and pumps rotate running motor at running motor is not steady please 08 01 freely by wind orflow standstill execute DC brake before start up without applying power Energy Saving Applications Purpose Functions P Punching machines Energy saving and Energy saving when the AC motor 08 17 fans pumps and less vibrations drive runs at constant speed yet full precision machinery power acceleration and deceleration For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations Multi step Operation Applications Purpose Functions E Conveying machinery operation by To control 15 step speeds and duration 04 05 04 08 ying y multi step speeds by simple contact signals 05 00 05 14 Switching acceleration and deceleration times Applications Purpose Functions Switching When an AC motor drive drives two or Cee Auto turntable for acceleration and 04 05 04 08 conveying machinery deceleration times b
5. D 14 D4 PEC Device S uiii pite te Eee eite pec eei dap nuances D 19 D 4 1 Summary of DVP PLC Device D 19 D 4 2 Devices Functions eerie teinte ded neues D 20 0 4 3 Value Constant K H D 21 0 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary D 22 0 4 5 The Function of Timer D 22 0 4 6 The Features and Functions of D 23 0 4 7 Register nnne D 24 0 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays D 25 D 4 9 Special Registers cedo ee er Dee D 26 D 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode D 27 0 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 D 28 D 5 Commands 5 cedit ert cle e oed epe d ce D 28 0 5 1 Basic Commandqs sss D 28 0 5 2 Output Commands sese eene D 29 0 5 3 Timer and Counters D 29 D 5 4 Main Control Commanwds sese D 29 0 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact D 29 0 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands D 30 D 5 7 End Command siisii eari ie teer needed D 30 D 5 8 Explanation for the
6. sseeemm B 25 10 1 4 Power Supply rne nitet intenti neta B 26 B 10 1 5 LEDs Display dee trees B 26 B 10 2 LonWorks Communication Module CME LWO 1 B 26 B 10 2 1 Introduction ssseseee e B 27 B 10 2 2 DIMENSIONS 22 2 ete EHE B 27 B 10 2 3 Specifications B 27 eiit De doe exe NEC tien eec B 28 B 10 2 5 LED Indications siiani enanats B 28 B 10 3 Profibus Communication Module CME PD01 B 28 B 10 3 1 Panel B 29 B 10 3 2 DIMENSIONS 2 20 scene otn rte rone tec B 30 B 10 3 3 Parameters Settings in VFD E B 30 B 10 3 4 Power Supply mirren anniina 30 B 10 3 5 PROFIBUS Address B 30 B 10 4 1 31 B 10 4 1 Product Profile B 31 B 10 4 2 Specifications estes sessed onesies deett res B 31 B 10 4 3 Components sssssseeee emen B 32 B 10 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting B 33 mec m m B 35 BT AAMKE DRA iiiter ctt a B 35 B 11 2 MKE DRB a iie Lee dei gae gie tu a SS nRT B 36 B 11 3 MKE EP inii o R
7. Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters For continuous and 08 15 08 16 Air conditioners reliable operation Tne arive 2 10 remote pumps without operator restarte reset automatically up to intervention times after a fault occurs Emergency Stop by DC Brake gs bags Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters AC motor drive can use DC brake for 08 00 Emergency stop emergency stop when quick stop is 08 02 High speed rotors without brake needed without brake resistor When 08 03 resistor used often take motor cooling into 2 consideration Over torque Setting Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The over torque detection level be 06 00 06 05 To protect set Once OC stall OV stall and over Pumps fans and Geni Ge and to torque occurs the output frequency hee have continuoue Will be adjusted automatically It is reliable operation suitable for machines like fans and P pumps that require continuous operation Upper Lower Limit Frequency Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Control the motor When user cannot provide 01 07 Pump and fan speed within upper lower limit gain or bias from 01 08 upper lower limit external signal it can be set PP individually in AC motor drive Skip Frequency Setting mre Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The AC motor drive cannot run at 08 09 08 14 To prevent constant speed in the skip freque
8. Qu 7 69 Store clean dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes Store within an ambient temperature range of 20 C to 60 C Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA DO NOT place on the ground directly It should be stored properly Moreover if the surrounding environment is humid you should put exsiccator in the package DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature It may cause condensation and frost If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months the temperature should not be higher than 30 C Storage longer than one year is not recommended it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places with humidity and dust it s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Receiving and Inspection This VFD E AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment After receiving the AC motor drive please check for the following a Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive the User Manual Quick Start and CD Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment Make sure that the
9. 20 1 BR Resistor Temperature Eh ee mg E sw Gs his ec lo oe Switch Note1 When using the AC drive with DC reactor please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive user manual for the wiring of terminal P of Brake unit Note2 Do NOT wire terminal N to the neutral point of power system Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 3 Appendix B Accessories B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors Dimensions are in millimeter Order P N BR080W200 BR080W750 BR300W100 BR300W250 BR300W400 BR400W150 BR400W040 Model no L1 L2 H D w Max Weight g BRO80W200 140 125 20 5 3 60 160 BRO80W750 BR300W100 BR300W250 215 200 30 5 3 60 750 BR300W400 BR400W150 265 250 30 5 3 60 930 BRA00WO040 B 4 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Order P N BR500W030 BR500W100 BR1KW020 BR1KW075 Appendix B Accessories Model no L1 L2 Max Weight g BR500W030 BR500W100 335 320 30 5 3 60 1100 BR1KW020 BR1KWO075 400 385 50 5 3 100 2800 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 5 Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR1KOW050 A CKONS A 6c R4 6 2X 95 0 Order P N BR1KOW050 BR1K2W008 BR1K2W6P8 BR1K5W005 BR1K5W040
10. Ea 3 Communication Protocol 3 1 Communication Data Frame ASCII mode STX Start character Address Hi Communication address Address Lo 8 bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Command code Function Lo 8 bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA n 1 Contents of data to Nx8 bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes DATA 0 n lt 20 maximum of 40 ASCII codes Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 115 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 116 LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum LRC CHK Lo 8 bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes END Hi End characters END Lo END1 CR 0DH ENDO LF 0AH RTU mode START A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address Communication address 8 bit address Function Command code 8 bit command DATA nel Contents of data mud nx8 bit data lt 40 20 x 16 bit data CRC CHK Low CRC check sum CRC CHK High 16 bit check sum consists of 2 8 bit characters END A silent interval of more than 10 ms 3 2 Address Communication Address Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254 Acommunication address equal to 0 means broadcast to all AC drives AMD In this case the AMD will not reply any message to the master device 00H broadcast to all AC drives 01H AC drive of address 01 OFH AC drive of address 15 10H AC drive of address 16 FEH AC drive of address 254 For e
11. Relay Output Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 9 2 Digital I O Card EME D33A aH EH Gt A a B 9 4 Communication Card CME USB01 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 23 Appendix B Accessories iit connect to extension card connect to PC E B 9 5 Speed Feedback Card EME PG01 R73 R74 9522205 8 R48 Yale O ees i we t 294541140000A B 10 Fieldbus Modules B 10 1 DeviceNet Communication Module CME DN01 B 10 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions 1 For RS 485 connection to VFD E 2 Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3 Address selector 4 Baud rate selector 5 Three LED status indicators for monitor Refer to the figure below B 24 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 59 7 2 35 57 3 2 26 Appendix B Accessories 3 5 0 14 B 10 1 2 Wiring and Settings Refer to following diagram for details UNIT mm inch MAC address Date Rate Setting baud rate 125K use decimal system CN CLV hos ADD2 v oan V ge on as ADD1 ADD2 E CA 500K amp 4 va D t Switch Baud Value Rate het Jie se j
12. 3 3 Trial Run The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal 02 01 2 1 Both MI1 DCM and MI2 DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD STOP and REV STOP 2 Please connect a potentiometer among AVI 10V and DCM or apply power 0 10Vdc to AVI DCM as shown in figure 3 1 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 3 3 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 Setting the potentiometer or AVI DCM 0 10Vdc power to less than 1V 4 Setting MI1 On for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running you should set MI2 On And if you want to decelerate to stop please set MI1 MI2 Off 5 Check following items Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad please operate by the following steps 1 Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive correctly 2 After applying the power verify that LED display shows F 0 0Hz 3 Set Pr 02 00 0 and Pr 02 01 0 Refer to Appendix B operation flow for detail 4 Press key to set frequency to around 5Hz 5 Press key for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running you should press ES in mune revel STOP decelerate to stop please press key 6 Check following items a
13. B 6 Revision June 2008 O4EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR200W150 BR200W250 I 09 22 10 a LI i NOMINAL Model no L1 2 L2 2 L3 2 W1 H1 BR200W150 165 150 110 30 60 BR200W250 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 7 Appendix B Accessories B 2 No fuse Circuit Breaker Chart For 1 phase 3 phase drives the current rating of the breaker shall be greater than 2 X rated input current 1 phase 3 phase Recommended Recommended Model no fuse Model no fuse breaker A breaker A VFD002E11A 11T 11C 15 VFD002E23A 23C 23T 5 11P 23P VFD002E21A 21T 21C 10 VFD004E23A 23C 23T 5 21P 23P VFD004E11A 11C 11T 20 VFD004E43A 43C 43T 5 11 43 VFD004E21A 21C 21T 15 VFD007E23A 23C 23T 10 21P 23P VFD007E11A 11C 30 VFD007E43A 43C 43T 5 43P VFD007E21A 21C 21T 20 VFD015E23A 23C 23T 20 21P 23P VFD015E21A 21C 30 VFD015E43A 43C 43T 10 VFD022E21A 21C 50 VFD022E23A 23C 30 VFD022E43A 43C 15 VFD037E23A 23C 40 VFD037E43A 43C 20 VFD055E23A 23C 50 VFD055E43A 43C 30 VFD075E23A 23C 60 VFD075E43A 43C 40 VFD110E43A 43C 50 B 8 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 3 Fuse Specification Chart Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted
14. 2 ed ted vin d d det ed i Table of Contents isinira niaaa eni eene nennen nennen nnn iii Chapter 1 Introduction 2 nn accen ecu 1 1 1 1 Receiving and Inspection 1 2 1 1 1 Nameplate Information 1 2 1 1 2 Model Explanation ssssssssssseeeenemeeenn 1 2 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 1 3 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 1 3 1 1 5 Remove Instructions sssee ee 1 6 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 8 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions ssssssnsaraeneninnsiniy eme 1 8 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel ter iei rope HR diee 1 11 1 3 DimensiOns rene dae ah 1 12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 ZV MIrlrig iieri ree ERE ERE E REX RU RIEN ee 2 2 2 2 External Wiring Dalee a seb Pt da 2 12 2 3 Mall CInCUitss aia baaa 2 13 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection eeesseee ee 2 13 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals eese 2 16 2 4 Control Terminals c cccccsssssessccssccsssessesccsuceus
15. Aphase PULSE Cm cw GENERATOR LJ L PG Pulse Range Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20000 Factory Setting 600 Ea A Pulse Generator PG is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the motor speed This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control Motor Pole Number Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Ea The pole number should be even can t be odd ETE M Proportional Gain P Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 Ea This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain P and is used for speed control with PG feedback Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 149 Chapter 4 Parameters X Integral Gain 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 00 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable This parameter specifies integral control and associated gain 1 and is used for speed control with PG feedback ETE X Speed Control Output Frequency Limit Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 00Hz Factory Setting 10 00 This parameter limits the amount of correction by the PI control on the output frequency when controlling speed via PG feedback It can limit the maximum output frequency output frequency Frequency command Speed detection 13 06 Speed Feedback Display Filter Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 500 When
16. 1 When Pr 02 05 is set to 0 or 2 AC motor drive will run immediately 2 When Pr 02 05 is set to 1 or 3 AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operation command is cancelled 4 56 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters MI1 DCM close ON OFF output frequency Pr 02 05 0 or 2 This action will follow MI1 DCM Change operation or MI2 DCM status Somm ANd Source y Pr 02 01 1 or 2 ON is close OFF is open output frequency ON ON ooo Pr 02 05 1 or 3 Ea When the operation command source isn t from the external terminals independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 if the two conditions below are both met 1 When operation command source is changed to external terminal Pr 02 01 1 or 2 2 The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different And the operation of the AC motor drive will be 1 When setting 0 or 1 the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status 2 When setting 2 or 3 the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status MI1 DCM close ON OFF ON power is applied OFF ON output frequency J Pr 02 05 0 0r 1 it will run output frequency Pr 02 05 2 or 3 it won t run when power is applied It needs to received a run command after previous command is cancelled A The Line Start Lockout feature
17. 12 Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating supervision Over Current Stall 13 i Active when the Over Current Stall function operating supervision When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn Heat Sink Overheat 14 off the drive When it is higher than 850C 185 it will be Warning ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision Active when the PID function is operating 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV i Zero Speed Output Active unless there is an output frequency present at Signal terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAVE ji Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt Pr 03 14 Deactivated when Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 15 after STOP command Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Multi function Input Terminal MI9 Multi function Input Terminal MI10 4 139 Chapter 4 Parameters 11 10 Multi function Input Terminal MI11 11 11 Multi function Input Terminal MI12 Settings 0 to 23 Factory Setting 0 Settings Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they 0
18. gt Iram The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning ET Upper Bound for Integral Control Unit 1 Settings 0 to 100 Factory Setting 100 This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain and therefore limits the Master Frequency Ea The formula is Integral upper bound Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 x Pr 10 05 This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 133 Chapter 4 Parameters Primary Delay Filter Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 2 5 sec Factory Setting 0 0 To avoid amplification of measurement noise the controller output a derivative digital filter is inserted This filter helps to dampen oscillations The complete PID diagram is in the following Integral il adit ma Digital Setpoint limit Limit filter 10 05 10 07 10 06 Input Freq PID Gain feedback 10 10 10 01 PID Output Frequency Limit Unit 1 Settings 0 to 110 Factory Setting 100 This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control The formula is Output Frequency Limit Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 X Pr 10 07 This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr 01 07 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 t
19. 00 08 Method 1 Re input original password into Pr 00 09 Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one Method 2 After rebooting password function will be recovered Password Decode Flow Chart 4 40 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 00 09 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr 00 08 Correct Password END 00 09 Chapter 4 Parameters Incorrect Password END 00 08 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr 00 08 3 chances to enter the correct password 1st time displays 1 if password is incorrect 2nd time displays 2 if password is incorrect 3rd time displays code blinking If the password was entered incorrectly after three tries the keypad will be locked Turn the power OFF ON to re enter the password Control Method Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 V f Control 1 Vector Control Ea This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive EXN Reserved EXS 50Hz Base Voltage Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 230V 400V 1 220V 380V Ea This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 41 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 1 Basic Parameters Maximum Output Frequency Fmax Unit 0 01 Settings 50 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 60 00 This par
20. Appendix B Accessories A Line Fuse Model Input Output 1 Bussmann P N VFD002E11A 11T 11C 6 1 6 15 JJN 15 11 VFD002E21A 21T 21C 4 9 1 6 10 JJN 10 121P VFD002E23A 23C 23T 1 9 1 6 5 JJN 6 23P VEDO04E11A 11C 11T 9 25 20 JJN 20 11 VFD004E21A 21C 21T 6 5 2 5 15 JJN 15 121P VFD004E23A 23C 23T 2 7 2 5 5 JJN 6 123P VFD004E43A 43C 43T 1 9 1 5 5 JJS 6 43P VFD007E11A 11C 18 4 2 30 JJN 30 VFD007E21A 21C 21T 9 7 42 20 JJN 20 121P VFD007E23A 23C 23T 5 1 4 2 10 JJN 10 23P VFD007E43A 43C 43T 3 2 2 5 5 JJS 6 43P VFD015E21A 21C 15 7 7 5 30 JJN 30 VFD015E23A 23C 23T 9 75 20 JJN 20 23P VFD015E43A 43C 43T 43 4 2 10 JJS 10 VFD022E21A 21C 24 11 50 JJN 50 VFD022E23A 23C 15 11 30 JJN 30 VFD022E43A 43C 74 5 5 15 JJS 15 VFD037E23A 23C 20 6 17 40 JJN 40 VFD037E43A 43C 11 2 8 2 20 JJS 20 VFD055E23A 23C 26 25 50 JJN 50 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 9 Appendix B Accessories I 1 Line Fuse Model Input Output 1 Bussmann P N VFD055E43A 43C 14 13 30 JJS 30 VFD075E23A 23C 34 33 60 JJN 60 VFD075E43A 43C 19 18 40 JJS 40 VFD110E43A 43C 26 24 50 JJS 50 B 4 AC Reactor B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 230V 50 60Hz 1 Phase kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Inguctance Amps Amps 3 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 6 6 5 0 4 1 2 5 7 5 3
21. Chapter 4 Parameters Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H Content of address 17H 2102H 70H Content of address 00H 2103H 00H CRC CHK Low FEH CRC CHK High 5CH 2 06H single write write single data to register Example writing data 6000 1770H to register 0100H AMD address is 01H ASCII mode Command message Response message 4 118 RTU mode STX 0 Address qi Function 6 m q Data address m q 7 Data content 7 o 7 LRC Check qi CR END LF Command message Address 01H STX pi Address q Function 6 m q Data address m qi 7 Data content 7 m 7 LRC Check q CR END LF Response message Address 01H Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH 3 08H loop detection Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH This command is used to detect if the communication between master device PC or PLC and AC motor drive is normal The AC motor drive will send the received message
22. D Ul A E Reserved 0 125K E J 7 Reserved T 3 8 Reserved E 4 1 250K 2 500K Other AUTO Setting MAC addresses B 10 1 3 Mounting Method Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto VFD E The dimension on the left hand side is for your reference Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 25 Appendix B Accessories Dimensions STEP 2 mpi sepa 22 woga i NM NES UNIT mm inch B 10 1 4 Power Supply No external power is needed Power is supplied via RS 485 port that is connected to VFD E An 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with this communication module is used to connect the RS 485 port between VFD E and this communication module for power This communication module will perform the function once it is connected Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications B 10 1 5 LEDs Display 1 SP Green LED means in normal condition Red LED means abnormal condition 2 Module Green blinking LED means no I O data transmission Green steady LED means I O data transmission OK Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal d Network Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal Red LED means abnormal gt Refer to user manual for detail information Chapter 5 Troubleshooting B 10 2 LonWorks Communication Mo
23. it can t connect DC BUS in parallel 2 8 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 7 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode A NPN mode without external power NPN FWD STOP 9 6 REV STOP Multi step 1 Factory T 9 setting i Multi step 2 Multi step3 _ o Multi step 4 La o C Digital Signal Common B NPN mode with external power NPN 24 Hw 0 FWD STOP REV STOP Multi step 1 Factory Sr setting i Multi step 2 o Multi step3 Multi step 4 55 PNP mode without external power NPN Hsn PNP FWD STOP REV STOP lt Multi step 1 Factory o setting Multi step 2 S Multi step3 0 O Multi step 4 5 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring D PNP mode with external power NPN Vise PNP E 24V FWD STOP d MI REV STOP 5 MI2 Multi step 1 T Factory P 5 5 Li MI3 setting Multi step 2 Li MI4 Multi step 3 MIB Multi step 4 5 0 MI6 m Figure 8 RJ 45 pin definition for VFD E C models PIN Signal Description 1 CAN H CAN H bus line dominant high 2 CAN L CAN L bus line dominant low 3 CAN GND Ground OV V 4 56
24. p Motor R L1 U T1 IM S L2 2 W T3 E JJ SA Recommended Circuit n MC RB RA when power supply Multi function contact output is turned OFF by a gt e Refer to chapter 2 4 for details fault output OFF ON rl RB Factory setting is malfunction indication 24V RG FWD Stop Factory setting T REV St 1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode op MI2 y gt Drive is in operation Factory Multi step 1 MI3 TM 48V50mA Max w i t T setting lt Multi step 2 MI4 Multi function PNP i Phot Iper Output Please refer to Figure 7 4 Multi step 3 MI5 MCM PRON shes ene Mou hid Multi step 4 55 AFM Analog Multi function Output Digital Signal Common Terminal mode 8 9 O DCM factory setting Analog freq I current meter 0 10VDC 2mA ACM E e Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency 10V F 3 Power supply RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models ave JAVI 1 Reserved Master Frequency 2 EV NI 1 Oto 10V 47K 9 3 GND ACI 4 SG ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V H 287 4 When switching to AVI ACM 8 4 T Re ed itindicates AVIZ Analog Signal Common T E 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 Mainc ircuit power terminals Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Control circuit terminals Shieldedleads amp Cable 2 3 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
25. 2 4 Motor PTC 07 15 Overheat Warning Level 0 1 10 0V 1 2 Motor PTC 07 16 Overheat Reset Delta Level 0 1 5 0V 0 6 Treatment of the 07 17 Motor PTC Overheat 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep running Motor Rated Current ien Motor 1 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor No Load il Current Motor 1 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque Compensation Motor 1 M 07 20 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 1 M 07 21 0 00 to 10 00 Motor Line to line 07 22 Resistance R1 Motor 1 0 65535 mQ Motor Rated Slip 07 23 1 0 00 to 20 00 Hz Motor Pole Number 07 24 Motor 1 2 to 10 Motor Rated Current 07 25 Motor 2 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor No Load 020 Current Motor 2 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque Compensation Motor 2 M 07 27 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 M 07 28 0 00 to 10 00 4 20 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 07 29 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 2 0 65535 mQ 07 30 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 07 31 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 2to 10 07 32 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 30
26. B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C If the operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example In 16 bit BIN subtraction When On the content in DO will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in D20 sw oo Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 53 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 22 MUL S S2 D Multiplication Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnM T C D MUL 7 steps 5 al amp llelele S ell a llelele D 5 mE Operands S1 Multiplicand 52 Multiplicator D Product Explanations 1 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices 2 This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S1 S2 and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit command On X b15 is a symbol bit b15is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b15 of D 1 Symbol bit 0 refers to a positive value Symbol bit 1 refers to a negative value When D serves as a bit device it can designate K1 K4 and construct a 16 bit result occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16 bit data Program Example The 16 bit DO is multiplied by the 16 bit D10 and bring
27. Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 27 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Fac Customer Setting Multi function Input 11 08 Terminal MI9 Multi function Input ES Terminal MI10 Multi function Input 110 Terminal MI11 11 11 Multi function Input Terminal MI12 4 28 5 External reset 6 Accel Decel inhibit T Accel Decel time selection command 8 Jog Operation 9 External base block 10 Up Increment master frequency 11 Down Decrement master frequency 12 Counter Trigger Signal 13 Counter reset 14 E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 NOT for VFD E C models 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Disabled Source of the 1st frequency Function 2 Source of the 2nd frequency S
28. When setting Pr 02 14 to 0 the initial frequency will be current frequency When setting Pr 02 14 to 1 the initial frequency will be 0 When setting Pr 02 14 to 2 the initial frequency will be Pr 02 15 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 59 Chapter 4 Parameters P Display the Master Freq Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting Ea You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 BitO 1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 2 Bit1 1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 4 Bit2 1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi input function Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command 8 Bit3 1 NOT for VFD E C models P Display the Operation Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting Ea You can read the operation source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 BitO 1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad 2 Bit1 1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication 4 Bit2 1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal 8 Bit3 1 Operation Command Source by Multi input function Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command xd NOT for VFD E C models 4 60 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 3 Output Function Parameters 03 01 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB
29. external terminal is correct Yes 4 Correct Yes wiring 4 Check if frequency for each step is different No Change defective potentiometer Yes No Check if accel decel 4 time is set correctly Change frequencysetting Yes Please set suitable accel decel time by load inertia Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 7 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration Motor stalls during Check if acceleration Yes acceleration time is too short Increase setting time No v Check if the inertia of the motor and load is too high Yes Use special motor Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Thicken or shorten the Y wiring between the es motor or AC motor drive Check for low voltage atinput No Reduce load or Yes increase the capacity oT load torque of AC motor drive 190 mg No Y Maybe AC motor drive has Check if the torque Yes malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA compensation is suitable No v Increase torque compensation 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected Motor does not run
30. 0 75 1 8 12 1 5 1 5 2 12 18 1 25 2 2 3 18 27 0 8 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP Fundamenta Em ee ps Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 04 12 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 8 12 3 5 5 5 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 15 20 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 B 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 115V 230V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP M gt Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 4 9 12 0 4 1 2 6 6 6 5 9 0 75 1 8 12 3 5 1 5 2 8 12 1 5 3 2 2 3 12 18 1 25 2 5 3 7 5 18 27 0 8 1 5 5 5 7 5 25 37 5 0 5 1 2 7 5 10 35 52 5 0 4 0 8 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP o _ aoe a Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 5 5 7 5 18 27 1 5 2 5 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 11 Appendix B Accessories B 4 3 Applications Connected in input circuit Application 1 Question When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power and one of them is ON during operation When applying power to one of the AC motor drive the charge cu
31. 1 o 1 optional AO2 optional For Example If Pr 03 10 displays 1 it means that AFM is used by PLC 4 66 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 03 11 Brake Release Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 EXE Brake Engage Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals Relay or MO1 when Pr 03 00 03 01 is set to 21 Refer to the following example for details Example 1 Case 1 Pr 03 12 gt Pr 03 11 2 Case 2 Pr 03 12 Pr 03 11 Frequency Output Case 1 Pr 03 12 Pr 03 11 Case 2 Pr 03 12 Time Run Stop Case 1 MO1 21 Case 2 1 21 Note 1 setting value of Pr 03 01 Display the Status of Multi function Output Terminals Settings Read Only Factory setting RLY Status Bit1 MO1 Status Bit2 MO2 RA2 Status Bit3 MO3 RA3 Status Bit4 MO4 RA4 Status Bitb MOS RAS Status Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 67 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 68 Bit6 MO6 RA6 Status Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function output terminals are falling edge triggered and Pr 03 13 will display 3 11 for no action f 0 Havre Weights 2 2 O Active 1 Off MO1 If Pr 03 13 displa
32. 2 84 59 7 2 35 _ 57 3 2 26 UNIT mm inch B 10 3 3 Parameters Settings in VFD E VFD E Baud Rate 9600 Pr 09 01 1 RTU 8 N 2 Pr 09 04 3 Freq Source Pr 02 00 4 Command Source Pr 02 01 3 B 10 3 4 Power Supply The power of CME PD01 is supplied from VFD E Please connect VFD E to CME PD01 by using 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with CME PD01 After connection is completed CME PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD E B 10 3 5 PROFIBUS Address TE 4s lt gt E CME PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address The set value via 2 address switches ADDH and ADDL is in HEX format ADDH sets the upper 4 bits and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Address Meaning 1 0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address 0 or Ox7E 0xFE Invalid PROFIBUS address 10 4 CME COP01 CANopen CME COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Delta VFD E AC motor drive B 10 4 1 Product Profile 7 66 port CANopen connection port RUN indicator indicator SP Scan Port indicator Baud rate switch Unit mm Address switch B 10 4 2 Specifications CANopen Connection Interface Pluggable connector
33. 4 v Y zs Explanations The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo 1 LD Load contact A of X0 H a A r 2 AND x1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDI Load B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Y v Y D 30 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation 1 LDI Load contact of AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function AND Series connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0O M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v v Y v v Explanations The AND command is used in the series connection of A
34. 5 5 0 22 9 3 0 36 C 130 0 5 12 116 0 4 57 260 0 10 24 246 5 9 70 169 2 6 66 5 5 0 22 9 8 0 38 Dra Frame VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T Frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C Frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E43C 1 12 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Dimensions for VFD E P series W1 M L D N N D1 4 mi 1 1 25 H1 j H2 H D dadel a 1 Tf S4 gi 1 1 W2 Unit mm inch w w1 w2 H H1 H2 D D1 o 72 0 56 0 30 0 155 0 143 0 130 0 111 5 9 5 5 3 2 83 2 20 1 18 6 10 5 63 5 12 4 39 0 37 0 21 gt Frame A VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 13 Chapter 1 Introduction This page intentionally left blank 1 14 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring After removing the front cover check if
35. Bytes not use E normal 0 expedited 1 S size indicated E 1 4 3 PDO Process Data Object PDO communication can be described by the producer consumer model Each node of the network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be processed or not after receiving the message PDO can be transmitted from one device to one another device or to many other devices Every PDO has two PDO services a TxPDO and a RxPDO PDOs are transmitted in a non confirmed mode PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index 1400h for the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO and all transmission types are listed in the following table Type Number 289 Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous RTR only 0 O 1 240 O 241 251 Reserved 252 O O 253 O O 254 255 Type number 1 240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions Type number 252 indicates the data is updated but not sent immediately after receiving SYNC Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR Type number 254 Delta CANopen doesn t support this transmission format Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 E 7 Appendix E CANopen Function Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dict
36. Chapter 4 Parameters Display the Status of Multi function Input Terminal Settings Read Only Factory setting Display BitO Status Bit1 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 MI4 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Bit5 MI6 Status Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status The multi function input terminals falling edge triggered For standard AC motor drive without extension card there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr 04 26 will display 63 111111 for no action Weights 2 22 2 2 2 0 Active For Example If Pr 04 26 displays 52 it means MI1 MI2 and MI4 are active The display value 52 3241644 1 X 25 1X 2 1X 2 bit 6 X 25 bit 5 X 2 bit 3 X 2 4 84 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Weights 22 272722 22 2 Ative Bit o o I Do o o wn T MI2 MI3 4 MIS MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 Ea When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 0 Active Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 2 2 2 2 1 0ff Bit E 2 3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 X Internal External Multi function Input Terminals Selection Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Fac
37. External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 STOP ramp to stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop i 0 Enable forward reverse operation 1 Disable reverse operation 2 Disabled forward operation 0 Disable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 47 eae 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Loss of ACI Signal 0200 4 20mA Up Down Mode Accel Decel Rate of Change of 02 08 UP DOWN Operation with Constant Speed Source of Second 02 09 Frequency Command Combination of the First and Second 0210 Master Frequency Command 402 11 Keypad Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz 60 00 Command Communication 02 12 Frequency Command 4 8 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 0
38. Figure 2 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E23A VFD004E23A 43A VFD007E23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E23C VFD004E23C 43C VFD007E23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E23P VFD004E23P 43P VFD007E23P 43P VFD015E23P BR brake resistor 1 optional BUE brake unit optional A Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker E id 3 Motor R L1 R L1 U T1 IM S L2 25 12 V T2 3 T L3 tf T L3 W T3 5 OE ji E SA Recommended Circuit i MC RB RA when powersupply Multi function contact output is turned OFF bya ORC Refer to chapter 2 4 for details fault output OFF ON n RB Factory setting is MC malfunction indication 24V RC FWD Stop Factory setting t REV St MI1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode MI2 Drive is in operation NPN Factory Multi step 1 MI3 Tta 48V50mA Max Sw1 i 7 1 A setting e Multi step 2 MIA Multi function PNP i Photocoulper Output Please refer to Figure 7 4 Multi step 3 MI5 MCM 4 forwiring of NPN i i 2 modeun JPN Multi step 4 MI6 AFM Analog Multifuncion Output Digital Signal Common Ay mode 8 9 DCM factory setting Analog freq jE ACM current meter 0 10VDC 2mA E Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency cy Eel RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models ACI woas J4 AV 1 Reserved Master Frequency 2 EV psw 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 SOND ACI amea ACI TA ACI AVI switc
39. If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has Visual inspection If there is any damage Visual inspection DC capacity of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Year Year If there is any leakage of liquid change of color cracks or Visual inspection deformation Measure static capacity when Static capacity gt initial value X 0 85 required Resistor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to Visual inspection smell overheating Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring If there is any disconnection between B1 Resistor value should be within 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 9 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Transformer and reactor of main circuit Mag Maintenance or peculiar smell Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Year Year If there is any abnormal vibration Visual aural inspection and smell O netic contactor and relay of main circuit Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection Tighten screw if
40. MOV H1A2B DO constant H Constant K In PLC it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number For example K100 means 100 in decimal number Exception The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X Y M S will be bit byte word or double word For example K2Y10 K4M100 K1 means a 4 bit data and K2 K4 can be 8 12 and 16 bit data separately Constant H In PLC it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number For example H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number D 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay There are output coil and A B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y It is unlimited usage times in program User can control loop by using auxiliary relay but can t drive external load directly There are two types divided by its characteristics 1 Auxiliary relay for general It will reset to Off when power loss during running Its state will be Off when power on after power loss 2 Auxiliary relay for special Each special auxiliary relay has its special function Please don t use undefined auxiliary relay D 4 5 The Function of Timer The unit of timer is 1ms 10ms and 100ms The count method is count up The output coil will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings The setting is K in decimal number Data register D can be also used as settings The real setting time of timer unit of timer settings Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1
41. Pr 12 22 should be set to 5 10 100 50 If Pr 12 21 is set to 0 the output voltage will correspond to the max output frequency 1223 AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO2 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IB IB IBI ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 12 24 AO2 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 1225 AO2 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 Setting method for the AO2 is the same as the 1 4 148 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details PG Input Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable PG 1 Single phase 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation Ea The relationship between the motor rotation and PG input is illustrated below A phase leads B phase Ewe Aphase gt CCW g phase 13 00 2 phase leads A phase REV cw A phase B phase 13 00 3
42. VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P Frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C Frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E43C For frame C To connect 6 AWG 13 3 mm wires use Recognized Ring Terminals 2 4 Control Terminals Circuit diagram for digital inputs NPN current 16mA NPN Mode PNP Mode i s 1 71 a s E m EM Multi Input LI A multi input i T Terminal i terminal 1 i b gt gt i DCM Internal Circuit Internal Circuit Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 17 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring The position of the control terminals RA RB RC AFM MCM MO1 coooeoooeoeeeeoeoeag RS 485 MI1 MI2 Ml4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V Terminal symbols and functions Factory Settings NPN mode ON Connect to DCM Terminal Symbol Terminal Function ON Run in MI1 direction MI1 Forward Stop command OFF Stop acc to Stop Method ON Run in MI2 direction MI2 Reverse Stop command OFF Stop acc to Stop Method MI3 Multi function Input 3 Refer to Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for programming the MI4 Multi function Input 4 Multi function Inputs MI5 Multi function Input 5 ON the activation current
43. When MI1 is OFF and MI2 is ON it selects motor 2 When MI1 and MI2 are ON it selects motor 3 4 78 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Accel Decel Time Selection Frequency Master Freq Delceleration Decel time 1 01 10 Acceleration Accel time 2 01 11 Decel time 2 Accel time 1 H ccel time 01 12 01 09 i Time RUN STOP H PU External terminal communication Accel Decel time 1 amp 2 Multi function Input Terminals Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 MI3 to MI6 Accel Decel Time and Multi function Input Terminals J Multi Step Speed 05 07 Frequency 05 06 05 08 05 05 i 05 09 0504 3 1 d Po 1405 10 05 08 3 roto PP Eo ogo T 0511 0502 i 5i 1 Po d P 0512 JOG Freq 0501 i 1 01 15 tod cooL do Bod de Pod d 05 13 7 0500 i i Pd ee P P d Pd P jMSM MaseySp ed d j ij ij Run Stop 122 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PU external terminals i i P ees St spee GNE CONES PT 5 wistomie1 YON pr mv my pm my mai 5 2nd speed DERE bd 4 2 2 OFF MO _ S 2 ES 3rd speed arb 7 A eee 1 1 1 1 228 3 OFF 3
44. When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 T 5KQ 259 X Analog Signal Common T Main circuit power terminals Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring BR rake resistor i optional B1 R L1 S L2 E RB RC 24V 1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MIS MI6 DCM 10V Power supply 10V 20mA AVI Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K ACI 4 20mA 0 10V ne EN Motor U T1 IM V T2 3 Ed ae W T3 E L RA Multi function contact output Refer to chapter2 4 for details RB l Factory setting is malfunction indication RC MO1 Factory setting o Driveis in operation pea 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function AFM Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter ACM 0 10VDC 2mA E Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 Serial interface 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND 4 SG 8 lt 1 5 SG 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable rg For VFD E T series the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals B1 and B2 directly But it can t connect DC BUS in parallel Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 7 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 6 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E23T VFD004E23T 43T VFD007E23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T Fuse NFB No Fuse Br
45. X7 X10 X11 The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point it is used to connect to external load It can be driven by input relay contact the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts It doesn t have the corresponding output relay if need it can be used as internal relay Equipment indication YO Y1 Y7 Y10 Y11 The symbol of equipment is Y and the number uses octal Internal relay The internal relay doesn t connect directly to outside It is an auxiliary relay in PLC Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit It can be driven by the contact of input relay output relay or other internal equipment Its contacts can be used unlimitedly Internal auxiliary relay can t output directly it should output with output point c Equipment indication MO M1 M4 M159 The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system Timer Timer is used to control time There are coil contact and timer storage When coil is ON its contact will act contact a is close contact b is open when attaining desired time The time value of timer is set by settin
46. of AC motor drive grounded ves Remove ground fault Ground fault 5 3 Over Voltage OV Over voltage Reduce voltage to No Is voltage within be within spec specification Yes x Yes Has over voltage occurred without load 5 3 3 Maybe AC motor drive No has malfunction or Y misoperation due to No When OV occurs check if the noise Please contact j4 voltage of DC BUS is greater DELTA than protection value js Yes Vv No Dose OV occur when Increase sudden acceleration deceleration stops time Yes No Increase Yes acceleration Increase setting time time No Y Need to consider using Reduce moment No m brake unit or of inertia Reduce moment of load inertia DC brake ns Use brake unit or DC brake pa 5s Need to check control method Please contact DELTA 5 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 4 Low Voltage Lv Low voltage i 2 Yes Is input power correct Or power including momentary power loss No Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Restart after reset Check if there is any malfunction yes component or disconnection in power supply circuit Change defective component and check connection No Check if voltage is within specifica
47. resistor divider R1 AVI ATKkO PTC ACM internal circuit Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 99 Chapter 4 Parameters Referto following calculation for protection level and warning level 1 Protection level Pr 07 14 Vato Rerci A7K R1 Rerci A7K 2 Warning level 07 16 Retc2 47K R1 Retc2 47K 3 Definition V 10 voltage between 10V ACM Range 10 4 11 2VDC RPTC1 motor PTC overheat protection level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 14 RPTC2 motor PTC overheat warning level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 15 47 is AVI input impedance R1 resistor divider recommended value 1 20kQ the standard PTC thermistor as example if protection level is 13300 the voltage between 10V ACM is 10 5V and resistor divider R1 is 4 4kQ Refer to following calculation for Pr 07 14 setting 1330 47000 1330 47000 1330 47000 1293 4 10 5 1293 4 4400 1293 4 2 38 V 2 4 V Therefore Pr 07 14 should be set to 2 4 resistor value Q 1330 temperature Tr 5 C Tr 5C 07 15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 1 2 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 5 0V Factory Setting 0 6 07 17 Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep
48. 0 04 is set to 14 its display will be updated regularly This update time is set by Pr 13 06 ETE Speed Feedback Filter Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 16 This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card ETE M Time for Feedback Signal Fault Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 10 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 0 0 Disabled Ea This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning see Pr 13 08 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time B If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal 4 150 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 13 08 X Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep operating Ea AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback or PG encoder feedback are abnormal 13 10 Source of the High speed Counter NOT for VFD E C models Factory Setting Read only Settings 0 PG card 1 PLC Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 151 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 4 Different Parameters for VFD E C Models Software version for VFD E C is V1 00 for power board and V2 00 for control board X The parameter can be set during operation Group 0 User Parameters
49. 02 00 to 5 CANopen communication Step 3 CANopen station setting set Pr 09 13 CANopen Communication Address 1 127 Step 4 CANopen baud rate setting set Pr 09 14 CANBUS Baud Rate Step 5 Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary Set Pr 04 05 to 04 08 or Pr 11 06 to 11 11 to 23 According to DSP 402 motion control rule CANopen provides speed control mode There are many status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop To get current status please read Status Word Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external terminals Control word is a 16 byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition The status bits are bit 4 to bit 6 as shown in the following Bit 4 ramp function enabled Bit 5 ramp function disabled Bit 6 rfg use reference Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 E 13 Appendix E CANopen Function 1 Following is the flow chart for status switch Power Disable E 14 9 OXXXXX0X Fault Start Fault Reaction Active X0XX1111 Not Ready to Switch On reni X0XX1000 XXXXXXXX Switch OnDisable X1XX0000 OXXXXXO0OX OXXXX110 or QStop 1 OXXXX01X QStop 0 OXXXX01X Ready to Switch On or XXXXX X01X0001 k 0Xxxx111 OXXXX110 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11
50. 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 1 Over Current OC OCA ocd OC Over current Over current 7 Over current during acceleration during deceleration Remove short circuit PERGEN Check if there is any short circuits and or ground fault grounding between the U V W and motor jw No No Reduce the load or Yes E increase the power Check if load is too large of AC motor drive No No No Reduce torque compensation compensation Yes Reduce torque compensation Check if Check i No is too short by V is too short by load inertia load inertia No acceleration time deceleration time Yes Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error due to noise Please contact DELTA le N lei Yes Y AA Yes acceleration Yes Can deceleration time be made longer time be made longer No No Y Increase accel decel Reduce load or increase time the power of AC motor drive Reduce load or increase Check braking 1 the power of AC motor method Please drive contact DELTA Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 1 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 Ground Fault Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA GFF Is output circuit cable or motor
51. 11 D 3 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Device ID 0 1 Terminals of AC RY MO1 Drives Relay Card 2C RY2 RY3 EME DR2CA Relay Card 3A EME R3AA RY2 RY3 RY4 HENE DISAN 2 MO2 MO3 MO4 lt D 2 3 WPLSoft Installation Download PLC program to AC drive Refer to D 3 to D 7 for writing program and download the editor WPLSoft V2 09 at DELTA website http www delta com tw product em plc plc software asp Dco SCARS wERIEG S B o0e eQghEagaS 4 RREAN Bink I mO i Beber Rew 10 Col 1 W350 Siepe Type D 4 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function aBa X 662M LET 15 RA RR oS D 2 4 Program Input 0 M1000 ITMR Tl 5 ITMR T2 v qo 14 2 RST Tl T2 20 3791 D 2 5 Program Download Please do following s 4 for program download ODE Step 1 Press button 84 for compiler after inputting program WPLSoft Step 2 After finishing compiler choose the item Write to PLC in the communication items After finishing Step 2 the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the communication format Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 5 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 2 6 Program Monitor If you execute start
52. 220 00 B 14 B 6 Remote Controller RC 01 eese B 15 B PIR WOG Cog PO DB ND RR e e a sain ied B 16 B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD PUJO6 B 16 B 7 2 Explanation of Display B 16 B 7 3 Operation Flow Chart B 17 B 8 KPE LEQ02 5 eerie a eiecti rein B 18 B 8 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE LEO2 B 18 B 8 2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad B 20 B 8 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypads tease B 21 B S Extension er ien eL enc teenies 22 B 9 1 Relay Gard niea ete ees B 22 B 92 Digital l O Card ierit tete intrent B 23 B 9 3 Analog I O Card nine iere dedans B 23 B 9 4 Communication Card sse B 23 B 9 5 Speed Feedback B 24 B 10 Fieldbus Modules eren B 24 B 10 1 DeviceNet Communication Module CME DNO 1 B 24 B 10 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions B 24 B 10 1 2 Wiring and B 25 B 10 1 3 Mounting Method
53. 4 23 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 0 1 120 0 409 03 Time out Detection 0 0 Disable 0 7 N 2 Modbus ASCII 1 7 E 1 Modbus ASCII Communication 2 7 0 1 Modbus ASCII 3 8 N 2 Modbus RTU 4 8 E 1 Modbus RTU 5 8 0 1 Modbus RTU 6 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 7 8 E 2 Modbus RTU 8 8 0 2 Modbus RTU 9 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII 09 05 Reserved 09 06 Reserved 709 07 Response Delay 0 200 unit 2ms Time Baud rate 4800 bps Baud rate 9600 bps Transmission Speed 09 08 for USB Card Baud rate 19200 bps 2 Baud rate 38400 bps Baud rate 57600 bps 7 N 2 for ASCII Z E 1 for ASCII Communication 7 0 1 for ASCII 409 09 Protocol for USB 1 Card 8 N 2 for RTU 8 E 1 for RTU 8 0 1 for RTU 4 24 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 amp gt CO KR Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 6 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 7 8 E 2 Modbus RTU Communication 8 8 0 2 Modbus RTU forUSB Fg 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII 0 Warn and keep operating Transmission Fault 4 warn and ramp to stop Treatment for USB Card 2 Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating 09 14 Time out Detection 0 1 120 0 seconds for USB 0 0 Disable COM port for PLC 0 RS485 Communication 1 USB card NOT for VF
54. 4 52 as shown in the following Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Bit The setting value bitSx2 bit4x2 bit2x2 ieee Moe 2 T 2 it2x 2 16384 2 8192 2 4096 2 2048 2 1024 1 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 2 512 2 256 2 128 2 64_ 2 32 32 16 4 52 4 3 2 1 0 Setting 04 09 2 16 2 8 2 4 2 2 221 Ea When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 0 N O Weights 27 202 2 27 2 2 of 2 2 2 2 1 Bit 04 10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Unit 2ms Settings 1 to 20 Factory Setting 1 Ea This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 81 Chapter 4 Parameters The Digital Input Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory setting Display Bit0 1 MI1 used by PLC Bit1 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC Bit4 1 used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used
55. 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Over Current Stall 13 n Active when the Over Current Stall function operating supervision i Heat Sink Overheat When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn off Warning the drive When it is higher than 85 C 185 F it will be ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level 2 Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal Refer to 16 PID supervision Pr 10 12 and Pr 13 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV Zero Speed Output 19 Active when the drive is standby or stop Signal Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAVE i Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt Pr 03 11 Deactivated when Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 12 after STOP command 22 Drive Ready Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected Desired Frequency 2 23 q y Attained Active when the desired frequency 1 Pr 03 14 is attained Desired Frequency 2 Attained 0 00 to 600 0 Hz EE Desired Frequency 1 Attained Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Settings Factory Setting 0 00 If a multi function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 03 00 to Pr 03 01 09 then the output will be activated when
56. 43A VFD002E110C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Frame Power range Models VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A B 1 5hp 0 75 3 7kW VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A c 7 5 15hp 5 5 11kW VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E43C RFI Jumper RFI Jumper The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference Radio Frequency Interference on the power line Main power isolated from earth If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power IT power the RFI jumper must be cut off Then the RFI capacities filter capacitors will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage according to IEC 61800 3 and reduce earth leakage current ANa 1 After applying power to the AC motor drive do not cut off the RFI jumper Therefore please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1 000V Besides electro magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after
57. 5 08mm Transmission method CAN Transmission cable 2 wire twisted shielded cable Electrical isolation 500V DC Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 31 Appendix Accessories Communication Process Data Objects 10 Kbps PDO 20 Kbps Service Data Object 50 Kbps SDO Bard 125 Kbps Message type Synchronization rate 250 Kbps SYNC 500 Kbps Emergency EMCY 800 Kbps Network Management 1 Mbps NMT Product code Delta VFD E AC motor drive 22 Device type 402 Vendor ID 477 Environmental Specifications Noise Immunity Environment Vibration Shock Resistance Certifications ESD IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 2 8KV Air Discharge EFT IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 4 Power Line 2KV Digital I O 1KV Analog amp Communication I O 1KV Damped Oscillatory Wave Power Line 1KV Digital I O 1KV RS IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 3 26MHz 1GHz 10V m Operation 0 C 55 C Temperature 50 95 Humidity Pollution degree 2 Storage 40 C 70 C Temperature 5 95 Humidity Standard IEC 1131 2 IEC 68 2 6 TEST Fc IEC1131 2 amp IEC 68 2 27 TEST Ea Standard IEC 61131 2 UL508 B 10 4 3 Components Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port To connect with CANopen use the connector enclosed with CME COP01 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring Pin Signal Content 1 CAN Ground 0V V 2 CAN L Signal 3 SHI
58. 5zx 4thspeed od cg pot 2 229 M3tome a Jog Freq OFF i i LON Multi speed via External Terminals Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 79 Chapter 4 Parameters MI6 4 MI5 3 MI4 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2 speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3 speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON WI Multi function Input Contact Selection Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 B B m D m D 4 80 This parameter be used to set the status of multi function terminals MI1 MI6 N O N C for standard AC motor drive The MI1 MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal 2 3wire Weights 2 2 2 2 27 2 0 N O Bit The Setting method It needs to convert binary number 6 bit to decimal number for input For example if setting MI5 MI6 to be N C and MI1 MI2 MIA to be N O The setting value Pr 04 09 should be bit5X2 bit4X2 bit2X27 1X2 1X2 4 1X27 32 16
59. 600 sec Characteristic 0 No fault 1 Over current oc Present Fault Record Over voltage ov IGBT Overheat 0H1 Power Board Overheat 0H2 Overload oL Overload1 oL 1 Motor over load oL2 06 09 Second Most External fault EF Recent Fault Record Current exceeds 2 times rated current uring accel ocA Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 17 Qo o N o oc A o N Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground fault GFF 13 Reserved 14 Phase Loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto Acel Decel failure CFA 06 10 Third Most Recent 17 SW Password protection codE Fault Record 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF 1 06 11 Fourth Most Recent 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 Fault Record 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 dias Fifth Most Recent 25 V phase error cF3 1 Fault Record 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF 1 1 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 35 39 Reserved 40 Comm
60. 647 2 settings can be positive negative numbers by using constant or data register D special data register D1000 D1044 is not included If using data register D the setting will occupy two continuous data register The total band width of high speed counter that VFD E supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse input D 4 7 Register Types There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following 1 General The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN register to STOP or power is off 2 Special Each special register has the special definition and purpose It is used register to save system status error messages monitor state D 24 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays Special M Function Read R Write W M1000 Normally open contact a contact This contact is On when running and it is On when the status is set to RUN R M1001 Normally closed contact b contact This contact is Off in running and it is Off when the status is set to RUN M1002 On only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get positive pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period M1003 Off only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get negative pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period M1004 Reserved M1005 Fault ind
61. A1 CTL V2 11 Please check the wiring and power system for abnormal power Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 9 Motor cannot Run Motor cannot run Reset after clearing fault and then RUN Check KPE LE02 for normal display Yes Yes Check if there is any fault code displayed It can run when no faults occur Press RUN key to check if it can run Press UP key to set frequency fYes N Nor REV command Check if non fuse breaker and magnetic contactor are ON No Set them to ON Yes Check if any faults Check if input No occur such as voltage is normal Lv PHL or disconnection Yes Y Input RUN command 5 Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA by keypad Check if input FWD No Y Press UP to check if motor Yes can run 4 No No No Set frequency or not Modify frequency N Yes setting if upper bound freq supe and setting freq is lower than the min output freq No Motor has malfunction Check if the setting oftorque compensation is correct Check if there is any output voltage from terminals U V and No Check if the wiring of terminal FWD and between REV DCM is correct Yes Change switc
62. B contact of each output contact Y in program But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program Otherwise the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The output of YO will be decided by circuit 2 ie decided by On Off of X10 lI YO is repeated 10 y Pe D 4 3 Value Constant H X K Decimal K 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation Constant Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation There are five value types for DVP PLC to use by the different control destination The following is the explanation of value types 1 Binary Number BIN It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage The relative information of binary system is in the following Bit Bit is the basic unit of binary system the status are 1 or 0 Nibble It is made up of continuous 4 bits such as b3 b0 It can be used to represent number 0 9 of decimal or O F of hexadecimal Byte Itis made up of continuous 2 nibbles i e 8 bits b7 b0 It can used to represent 00 FF of hexadecimal system Word It is made up of continuous 2 bytes i e 16 bits b15 b0 It can used to represent 0000 FFFF of hexadecimal system Double It is made up of continuous 2 words i e 32 bits b31 b0 It can used to Wo
63. CANopen eroe i STE rror Display Error Description Error Code Code bit 0 7 cFe 0020H Internal EEPROM can not be read 5530h E r 0021H Analog signal error FFOOh 7 BEC Y 0023H Motor overheat protection 7120h 3 PLErR 0024H PG signal error 7300h 7 cP iQ 0029H Communication time out error on the 7500h 4 control board or power board Definition of Index T Index Sub Definition Setting R W Size Unit NOTE 0 1000 0 connection option code 0x00010192 RO Hes 0x1001 Error register 0 RO U8 COB ID SYNC 0x1005 message 0x80 RW U32 ox1006 0 Communication cycle Rw U32 us 500us 15000us period 0 Manufacturer device 0x1008 0 name 0 RO U32 Manufacturer abad Rs hardware version 0 iind ic Manufacturer software 0x100A 0 versioni 0 RO U32 0 100 0 Guarding time 016 ms 0x80 node 1 0 1000 0 Guarding factor 0 RW U8 0x0000080 0x1014 0 COB ID emergency Node ID 032 It is set to be 0x1015 O Inhibit time EMCY 0 RW U16 100us multiple of 10 0 Number 0 1 RO U8 Heartbeat time can 0x1016 1 Consumer heartbeat oxo RW U32 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid Heartbeat time can 0x1017 0 Producer heartbeat 0x0 RW U16 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid 0 Number 0x3 RO U8 1 Vender ID 0x000001DD RO U32 0x1018 0x00002600 2 Product code model RO U32 3 Revision 0x00010000 RO 032 Server SDO 0x
64. Curve 0119 Accel Decel Time 0 Unit 0 1 sec 1 Unit 0 01 sec Delay Time at OHz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 20 BE for Simple Position Delay Time at 10Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 21 2 for Simple Position Delay Time at 20Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 22 for Simple Position Delay Time at 30Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 23 uh for Simple Position 01 24 Delay Time at 40Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec for Simple Position Delay Time at 50Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 25 jh for Simple Position Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 220 0 01 27 Voltage Vmax Motor 1 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 440 0 Mid Point 01 28 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 1 1 50 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 ale Vmid Motor 1 Vmid Motor 1 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Minimum Output 01 30 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 1 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 01 31 Voltage Vmin Motor 1 460 series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Maximum Voltage 01 32 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Motor 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 5 Maximum Voltage 01 26 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Motor 1 Chapter 4 Parameters Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 33 Voltage Vmax Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Mid Point 01 34 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 2 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V t
65. Decelerate to 0 Hz 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 1 2 Continue operation by last frequency command 0 by UP DOWN Key 1 Based on accel decel time 2 Constant speed Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit Pr 02 08 s m 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved 1 0 to 10V from AVI 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 0 First Master Frequency Command 1 First Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 2 First Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 0 00 to 600 0Hz 60 00 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Y customer Setting 0 Save Keypad amp Communication The Selections for Frequency Saving Keypad or 02 13 Communication 1 Save Keypad Frequency only Frequency Command 2 Save Communication Frequency only Initial Frequency 0 by Current Freq Command Selection for 02 14 keypad amp 1 by Zero Freq Command RS485 USB 2 by Frequency Display at Stop Initial Frequency 02 15 Setpoint for keypad 0 00 600 0Hz 60 00 amp RS485 USB Read Only BitO 1 by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 Bec Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 Source Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command NOT for VFD E C models Read Only BitO 1 by Dig
66. Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO1 1 ACO analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Ea Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IE TA IR I ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 1 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current Ea This parameter is used to choose analog frequency 0 10Vdc or analog current 4 20mA to correspond to the AC motor drive s output frequency or current Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 B This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage range Ea When Pr 12 21 is set to 0 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output frequency When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the max output frequency Pr 01 00 setting corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA Ea When Pr 12 21 is set to 1 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output current When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the 2 5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 147 Chapter 4 Parameters Dr If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V refer to following formula to set Pr 12 22 Pr 12 22 full scale voltage 10 100 Example When using voltmeter with full scale 5V
67. No Function have no effect on operation Multi Step Speed 1 Command 1 These four inputs select the multi speed defined by Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 as shown in the diagram at the end of the table in B Multi Step Speed Pr 04 08 Command 2 NOTE Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 can also be used to control output Multi Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive s internal PLC 3 Command 3 function There are 17 step speed frequencies including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency to select for Multi Step Speed application Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad After faults such as O H O C and O V are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive 6 Accel Decel Inhibit When the command is active acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed 7 Selection Command Accel Decel Time Used to select the one of 2 Accel Decel Times Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 See explanation at the end of this table Control 4 140 Jog Operation Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI7 MI12 Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 for Jog control NOTE Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped Refer to parameter Pr 01 13 Pr 01 15 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description
68. PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 5 2 Output Commands Commands Function Operands OUT Drive coil Y M SET Action latched ON Y M RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y M T C D D 5 3 Timer and Counters Commands Function Operands TMR 16 bit timer T K or T D CNT 16 bit counter C K or C D D 5 4 Main Control Commands Commands Function Operands MC Connect the common series connection NO N7 contacts MCR Disconnect the common series connection NO N7 contacts D 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact Commands Function Operands LDP Rising edge detection operation starts X Y MT C LDF Falling edge detection operation starts X Y M T C ANDP Rising edge detection series connection X Y MT C ANDF Falling edge detection series connection X Y M T C ORP Rising edge detection parallel connection X Y M T C ORF Falling edge detection parallel connection X Y MT C Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 29 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands Commands Function Operands PLS Rising edge output Y M PLF Falling edge output Y M D 5 7 End Command Command Function Operands END Program end none D 5 8 Explanation for the Commands Mnemonic Function LD Load A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y
69. Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V 00 03 Start up Display Selection 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 3 Multifunction display see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 400 04 Content of Multi function Display 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 76 6 Output power factor angle n T Display output power P 4 152 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Setting Parameter Explanation Settings Customer 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI 1 V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 l
70. Speed Search Current doesn t Attain Speed Search Level Output frequency Input B B signal H Qo Stop output voltage Disable B B signal 06 01 Waiting time 08 07 Over current Restart stall prevention estan during acceleration Synchronization speed detection Output current A Keep accelerating Time FWD Run B B Fig3 B B Speed Search with Minimum Output Frequency Upward Timing Chart Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 105 Chapter 4 Parameters Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 5 0 sec Factory Setting 0 5 When momentary power loss is detected the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait m D m D for a specified period of time determined by Pr 08 07 called Base Block Time before resuming operation This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault Pr 08 15 When using a PG card with PG encoder speed search will begin at the actual PG encoder feedback speed Current Limit for Speed Search Unit 1 Settings 30 to 200 Factory Setting 150 4 106 Following a momentary power loss the AC motor drive will start its s
71. The total Accel Time Pr 01 09 Pr 01 17 or Pr 01 11 Pr 01 17 The total Decel Time Pr 01 10 Pr 01 18 or Pr 01 12 Pr 01 18 ko 25 Fm o Disable S curve Enable S curve Acceleration deceleration Characteristics Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 47 Chapter 4 Parameters Delay Time at OHz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Uu E Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 uz EM Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 XE Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 co This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation area When the multi function input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON it will start to decelerate after getting the delay time from Pr 01 20 to Pr 01 25 and get the final position This is simple position function NOT the precision position function t2 4 S Ml 25 2 Assume that the radius of the 4 pole motor is r and rotation speed is n rpm co 4 48 n Example 1 Assume that motor speed is 50Hz the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec Pr 01 25 2 and the deceleration time from 50Hz to OHz is 10 seconds The rotation speed n 120 X 50 4 rpm min 25 rpm sec The revolution numbers 25 X 2 12 2 175 rev
72. V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 57 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Operands D Device to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions Program Example When goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the left as shown in the figure below The bit marked with will be sent to carry flag M1022 Hi Rotate to the left upper bit lower bit M1022 DBRIRBRBIEIIeII o o o o p10 Carry x 1 Meg XXL 16 bits A After one rotation x upper bit lower bit M1022 Ok BRRBIBIoTeToToToToToToT1 T1411 p10 arry i flag D 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive API Mnemonic Operands Function 53 DHSCS S1 S2 D Compare for high speed counter Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps Sr x Y M K KnX KnY KnM T C D DHSCS 13 steps 1 S2 ii D Operands S1 Comparison Value S2 High speed counter C235 D Comparison result Explanations 1 It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse 2 To count automatically please set the target value by using DHSCS command and set M1028 On The counter C235 will be ON when the count number target value If you want to cle
73. V2 11 6 11 Appendix A Specifications There are 115V 230V and 460V models in the VFD E series For 115V models it is 1 phase models For 0 25 to 3HP of the 230V models there are 1 phase 3 phase models Refer to following specifications for details Voltage Class 115V Class Model Number VFD XXXE 007 Max Applicable Motor Output kW 0 75 Max Applicable Motor T hp 1 0 Rated Output Capacity VA 08 m 16 Li 2200 42 3 Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage Output Rating Single phase Rated Input Current A 6 9 18 Rated Voltage Frequency Single phase 100 120V 50 60Hz Voltage Tolerance 10 90 132 V Frequency Tolerance 5 47 63 Hz Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight kg 12 Input Rating Voltage Class 230V Class Max Applicable Motor Output hp 10 Rated Output Capacity kVA 06 10 6 29 42 65 95 125 D Maximum Output Voltage V 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage E Output Frequency Hz 0 1 600 Hz Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 Single 3 phase 3 phase Rated Input t A alza 4 9 1 9 6 5 2 7 9 5 5 1 15 7 9 24 15 206 26 34 9 c Single 3 phase 3 phase Rated Voltage Frequency 200 240 V 50 60Hz 200 240V 50 60Hz Voltage Tolerance 10 180 264 V Frequency Tolerance 5 47 63 Hz Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight kg 1 2 1 9 3 5 NOTE the weight for VFD015E23P is 1 2kg Revi
74. Vmid Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 The V f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 Group 2 Operation Method Parameters X Source of First Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 1 X Source of Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Digital keypad is optional 4 50 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 ak U N Chapter 4 Parameters 0 to 10V from AVI 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Digital keypad potentiometer CANopen communication En En These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive The factory setting for master frequency command is 1 digital keypad is optional Setting 2 use the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI2 When setting to AVI AVI2 is indicated When the 3 switch on the upper right corner is s
75. by side mounting Non Condensing and not frozen Storage Transportation 20 C to 60 C Temperature Ambient Humidity Below 90 RH non condensing Vibration 9 80665m s 1G less than 20Hz 5 88m s 0 6G at 20 to 50Hz Environmental Conditions CEAC Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 A 3 Appendix A Specifications This page intentionally left blank A 4 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Note Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values Other resistors and values will void Delta s warranty Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference Refer to the Brake unit Module User Manual for further details Applicable i j o Motor Equivalent Brake Unit Part Brake Resistors Brake eee AC Drive Part No Torque Resistor Value No and Part No and Torque for each AC h gt hp kw KG M recommended Quantity Quantity 10 ED Motor Drive a 025 o2 VEP002E11A 11C 11P 200W 2500 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 343 2002 VFDOO2E11T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 343 2000 Hd os 4 1 1 11 0
76. command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 NOT for VFD E C models 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 BitO MI1 Bit1 MI2 Bit2 MI3 Bit3 MI4 Bit4 MI5 Bit5 MI6 Multi function Input BE 04 09 Contact Bit7 MI8 Bit8 MI9 Bit9 MI10 Bit10 MI11 Bit11 MI12 0 N O 1 N C P S MI1 to will be invalid when it is 3 wire control Digital Terminal 04 10 Input Debouncing 1 to 20 2ms 1 Time 04 11 Min AVI Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V Loo f 04 12 Min AVI Frequency 9 0 to 100 0 Loo f Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 13 Chapter 4 Parameters a wi an mere p a 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection mn com a RETE E AVI2 Read only Bit0 1 MI1 used by PLC Bit1 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC The Digital Input Bit4 1 MI5 used by PLC Used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used by PLC 4 14 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 0 0 0 04 23 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facts TY
77. contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation 1 LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 AND X0 Connect to contact A of X0 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 31 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ANI Series connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y ss Explanations The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x1 0 LD 1 Load contact A of X1 LH Connect to contact B of in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OR Parallel connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y v Explanations The OR command is used in the parallel connecti
78. distortion factor 1 05 1 1 depending on PWM method Pa Continuous motor capacity kVA ks Starting current rated current of motor Nr Number of motors in parallel Ns Number of simultaneously started motors GD Total inertia GD calculated back to motor shaft kg Load torque tA Motor acceleration time N Motor speed Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 3 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 2 General Precaution 4 Selection Note 1 When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large capacity power transformer 600kVA or above or when a phase lead capacitor is switched excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged To avoid this use an AC input reactor optional before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor Drive select the AC Motor Drive current gt 1 25x Sum of the motor rated currents The starting and accel decel characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive Compared to running the motor D O L Direct On Line a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected If higher starting torque is required such as for elevators mixers tooling machines etc use an AC Motor Dr
79. far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference If necessary let them cross only at 90 angle The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage 2 20 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring The specification for the control terminals RA RB RC The position of the control terminals Terminals 1 AFM MCM MO1 Terminals 2 Ww www ww wwwwwww MI1 MI2 MI4 MIS MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V RS 485 port Frame Control Terminals Torque Wire Terminals 1 5 kgf cm 4 4 in Ibf 12 24 AWG 8 3 0 2mm Terminals 2 2 kgf cm 1 7 in Ibf 16 24 AWG 1 3 0 2mm gt Frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P Frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C Frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VF
80. is 5 5 OFF leakage current tolerance is 10 A MIG Multi function Input 6 24V DC Voltage Source 24VDC 20mA used for PNP mode Common for digital inputs and used for NPN DCM Digital Signal Common mode Multi function Relay output Resistive Load N O a 5A N O 3A N C 240VAC 5A N O 3A N C 24VDC Multi function Relay output Inductive Load RB N C b UT 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 240VAC 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 24VDC Refer to Pr 03 00 for programming RC Multi function Relay common 2 18 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal z Factory Settings NPN mode Terminal Function Symbol ON Connect to DCM Maximum 48VDC 50mA Refer to Pr 03 01 for programming Max 48Vdc 50mA WY rn T MO1 DCM MO1 Multi function Output 1 Mot Photocoupler 4 MCM internal circuit MCM Multi function output Common for Multi function Outputs 10V Potentiometer power supply 10VDC 3mA Analog voltage Input Impedance 47KQ 10V avi circuit Resolution 10 bits Range 0 10VDC 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 internal circuit Set up Pr 04 11 Pr 04 14 04 19 04 23 ACM Common for AVI ACI AFM Analog current Input Impedance 2500 acy ean Resolution 10 bits Range 4 20mA R 0 Max Output Fre
81. is attained the contacts and the counting values will be unchanged To re count or to conduct the CLEAR motion please use the RST command Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of XO C2 counter Hien Te Tes Madii CNT C2K100 Setting is K100 Mnemonic Function MC MCR Master control Start Reset Operand NO N7 Explanations 1 MC is the main control start command When the MC command is executed the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted When MC command is OFF the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows Timer The counting value is set back to zero the coil and the contact are both turned OFF Accumulative timer The coil is OFF and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition Subroutine timer The counting value is back to zero Both coil and contact are turned OFF Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 39 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Counter The coil is OFF and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition Coils driven up by the OUT command All turned OFF Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition Application commands All of them are not acted but the nest loop FOR NEXT command will still be executed for times defined by users e
82. output frequency is at the 03 00 03 01 General application Provide a signal for running status desired frequency by frequency command a signal is given for external system or control wiring frequency attained Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 35 Chapter 4 Parameters Output Signal for Base Block em i Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When executing Base Block a signal 03 00 03 01 M Provide a signal for General application is given for external system control running status wiring Overheat Warning for Heat Sink Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When heat sink is overheated it will 03 00 03 01 General application For safety send a signal for external system or control wiring Multi function Analog Output Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The value of frequency output 03 06 General application Display running status current voltage can be read by connecting a frequency meter or voltage current meter 4 36 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings Group 0 User Parameters X This parameter can be set during operation ELE Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor D
83. resistor optional RA RC 4 24V MI1 _ MO1 MI2 wk MI3 2 MI4 MCM MI5 MI6 AFM DCM E ACM E 10V Power supply 10V 20mA AVI Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K ACI 4 20mA 0 10V ACM 8 1 E Multi function contact output Refer to chapter2 4 for details Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting Drive is in operation 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA nt Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 serial interface NOT for VFD E C models 1 Reserved 2 EV GND SG SGt Reserved Reserved Reserved For VFD E C models Control circuit terminals please refer to figure 8 Shielded leads amp Cable Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Figure 5 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E11T 21T VFD004E11A 21T VFD007E21T Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 S L2 Recommended Circuit l MC when powersupply is turned OFF bya OLE on fault output eee e FWD Stop Factory setting NPN Mode e REV Stop NPN Factory e Multi step 1 t svi setting Multi step 2 PNP i Please refer to Figure 7 Multi step 3 for wiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP t TE mode Digital Signal Common Factory setting ACI Mode AVI ACI AVI switch
84. set to 23 and the terminal is ON it cannot use keypad to change PLC mode Moreover when it is PLC2 you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals D 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function gt When power on after power off the PLC status will be in PLC1 Warning AN This RUN instruction will affect the state of the connected PLC Do you wish to continue No 4 When you in PLC2 please remember to change to PLC1 when finished to prevent anyone modifying PLC program gt When output input terminals MI1 MI9 Relay1 Relay 4 MO1 MOA are used in PLC program they cannot be used in other places For example When YO in PLC program is activated the corresponding output terminals Relay RA RB RC will be used At this moment parameter 03 00 setting will be invalid Because the terminal has been used by PLC gt The PLC corresponding input points for MI1 to MI6 are to X5 When extension card are added the extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in chapter D 2 2 D 2 2 Device Reference Table Device ID 0 1 Terminals of AC M4 M4 MIS MG Drives 3IN 3OUT Card EMED33A 7 7 7 7 M7 MP Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2
85. should be grounded separately Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible No brake resistor is built in the VFD E series it can install brake resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or frequent start stop Refer to Appendix B for details Multiple VFD E units can be installed in one location All the units should be grounded directly to a common ground terminal as shown in the figure below Ensure there are no ground loops xX Not allowed Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 External Wiring Power Supply FUSE NFB Magnetic contactor Input AC Line Reactor Zero phase Reactor EMI Filter S L2 Zero phase Reactor Line Reactor 2 12 Items Explanations Power Please follow the specific power supply supply requirements shown in Appendix A There may be an inrush current during power up Please check the Fuse NFB chart of Apbin dx B and select the Optional _ correct fuse with rated current Use of an NFB is optional Magnetic Please do not use a Magnetic contactor contactor as the vO switch of the AC Optional motor drive as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the AC drive Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC li
86. the content in DO will plus the content in 010 and the sum will be stored in D20 Lp pes To Ts Remarks Flags and the positive negative sign of the values 16 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag Y YON CN 2 1 0 32 768 4 1 0 1 32 767 0 1 2 The highest bit The highest bit Borrowflag of the data of the data Garry flag 1 negative 0 positive 32 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag EN CN X 2 1 0 2 147 483 648 1 0 1 9 2 147 483 647 0 1 2 hn bard 7 The highest bit Borrow flag The highest bit of the data of the data Carry flag 1 negative 0 positive D 52 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 21 SUB P S4 S2 D Subtraction Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnY KnM T C D SUB SUBP 7 steps S els E DSUB DSUBP 13 steps S2 ol E a fo lls D 7 a e Operands S1 Minuend S2 Subtrahend D Remainder Explanations 1 This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D 2 highest bit is symbolic bit O and 1 which is suitable for algebraic subtraction 3 Flag changes in binary subtraction In 16 bit instruction A If the operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On
87. the power and control terminals are clear Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring General Wiring Information Applicable Codes All VFD E series are Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL and Canadian Underwriters Laboratories cUL listed and therefore comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code NEC and the Canadian Electrical Code CEC Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in Wiring Notes as a minimum standard Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data The Line Fuse Specification in Appendix B lists the recommended fuse part number for each VFD E Series part number These fuses or equivalent must be used on all installations where compliance with U L standards is a required 1 Make sure that power is only applied to the R L1 S L2 T L3 terminals Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or electric shock Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration Check following items after finishing the wiring A Are
88. the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters During Auto deceleration regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time But when this parameter is set to 04 the actual accel decel time will be equal to or more than parameter Pr 01 09 Pr 01 12 Auto acceleration deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor In applications with brake resistor or brake unit Auto deceleration shall not be used va Acceleration S Curve Unit 0 1 0 01 Deceleration S Curve Unit 0 1 0 01 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 0 S curve disabled 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 S curve enabled 10 0 10 00 is the smoothest This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S curve The S curve is disabled when set to 0 0 and enabled when set to 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 Setting 0 1 0 01 gives the quickest and setting 10 0 10 00 the longest and smoothest S curve The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel Decel Times in Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel Decel Time is only for reference when the S curve is enabled The actual Accel Decel Time depends on the selected S curve 0 1 to 10 0
89. to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Frequency Fmax Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 3 Chapter 4 Parameters Explanation Maximum Voltage 01 01 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 0 Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 02 Voltage Vmax Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V i Mid Point Frequency 01 03 Fmid Motor 0 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 01 04 Vid Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Minimum Output 01 05 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 0 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 01 06 Voltage Vmin Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 01 07 Output Frequency 0 1 to 120 0 110 0 Upper Limit Output Frequency 0 0 to100 0 01 08 Md Lower Limit A01 13 Jog Acceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Time A01 14 Jog Deceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Time A 01 15 Jog Frequency 0 10 Hz to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz 0 Linear Accel Decel 1 Auto Accel Linear Decel Auto acceleration 01 16 deceleration refer 2 Linear Accel Auto Decel to Accel Decel time setting 3 Auto Accel Decel Set by load 4 Auto Accel Decel set by Accel Decel Time setting 4 4 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters eee Ee Settings Setting Setting 01 17 Acceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec Curve 01 18 Deceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec
90. to the master device ASCII mode Command message Response message STX 0 Address 4 0 Function g 0 0 Data address 0 0 4 7 Data content 7 0 7 LRC Check m CR END LF Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CT L V2 11 STX EE o Address 4 o Function g m m Data address m m T Data content T T LRC Check o CR END LF 4 119 Chapter 4 Parameters RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 08H Function 08H 00H 00H Data address Data address 00H 00H 17H 17H Data content Data content 70H 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH CRC CHK High 1FH 4 10H write multiple registers write multiple data to registers Example Set the multi step speed Pr 05 00 50 00 1388H Pr 05 01 40 00 AC drive address is 01H ASCII Mode Command message Response message STX z STX A Address 1 0 Address 1 0 Address 0 T Address 0 i Function 1 T Function 1 T Function 0 0 Function 0 0 oO T Starting data D Starting data 5 address 0 address 0 oO oO oO oO Number of data
91. unit BUE series Earth connection please comply with local regulations Mains power terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Connect these terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 via a no fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3 phase AC power some models to 1 phase AC power for circuit protection It is unnecessary to consider phase sequence It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor MC in the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives Both ends of the MC should have an R C surge absorber Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A When using a general GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter select a current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than 0 1 second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above Do NOT run stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON OFF Run stop AC motor drives by RUN STOP command via control terminals or keypad If you still need to run stop AC drives by turning power ON OFF it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour Do NOT connect 3 phase models to a 1 phase power source Output terminals for main circuit U V W 2
92. within the AC motor drive rated input voltage range Check for abnormal load in motor Check for correct wiring of input power to R S T for 3 phase models without phase loss Check whether the motor is overloaded Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 Use the next higher power AC motor drive model Check for possible motor overload Check electronic thermal overload setting Use a higher power motor Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr 07 00 Reduce the motor load Adjust the over torque detection setting to an appropriate setting Pr 06 03 to Pr 06 05 Return to the factory When the external input terminal B B is active the AC motor drive output will be turned off Deactivate the external input terminal B B to operate the AC motor drive again Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Name Over current during acceleration ood Over current during deceleration Over current during constant speed operation cc cf External Fault c F ig Internal EEPROM can not be programmed 1 Internal EEPROM can not be programmed c 7 5 Internal EEPROM can not be 2 3 1 Internal EEPROM can not be cre read c F 30 U phase error TH c E 32 W phase error 33 OVortv erg a Te
93. 0 Number of data 0 count by word 0 count by word 0 D 2 Number of data 0 E count by byte g LRC Check g T CR The first data 3 END LF content 3 g oO The second data F content A oO LRC Check N CR END LF 4 120 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 10H Function 10H Starting data 05H Starting data address 05H address 00H 00H Number of data 00H Number of data 00H count by word 02H count by word 02H Number of data 04 CRC Check Low 41H count by byte The first data 13H CRC Check High 04H content 88H The second data OFH content AOH CRC Check Low 4DH CRC Check High D9H 3 4 Check sum ASCII mode LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check is calculated by summing up module 256 the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2 s complement negation of the sum For example reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H STX E Address 1 0 Address 0 dq Function 1 0 Function 0 g m 4 Starting data address 0 q 0 o Number of data 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 121 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 122 LRC C
94. 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 10 11th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 11 12th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 12 13th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 13 14th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 14 15th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency Group 6 Protection Parameters Factory 4 16 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Over Current Stall Prevention during Accel 115 230V series 330 0V to 410 0V 460V series 660 0V to 820 0V 0 0 Disable over voltage stall prevention 0 Disable 20 to 250 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Over Current Stall 0 Disable 06 02 Prevention during 170 Operation 20 to 250 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during constant speed operation After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Enabled during constant speed operation Over Torque 06 03 Detection Mode After the over torque is detected stop OL2 running 3 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected stop running Over Torque Detection Level 1010 200 Over Torque Electronic Thermal 0 Standard motor self cooled by fan Overload Relay 06 06 Selection 1 Special motor forced external cooling 2 2 Disabled 06 07 Electronic Thermal 30 to
95. 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 111 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 9V 100 111 10V adjustment 6 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 OIN _ OH Negative bias 6 6Hz Example 7 Use of 0 10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction In this example the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction The motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid point of its scale Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 71 Chapter 4 Parameters Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 50 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 200 Input gain Pr 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 5V 100 200 Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 200 Example 8 Use negative slope In this example the use of negative slope is shown Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure temperature or flow The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal 10V at high pressure or flow With negative slope settings the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction reverse This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor Pr 01 00 60Hz Max
96. 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 49 Chapter 4 Parameters 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage
97. 05 will be set automatically 1 The steps for AUTO Tuning are 1 sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct 2 Make sure the motor has no load before executing auto tuning and the shaft is not connected to any belt or gear motor 3 Fill in Pr 01 01 Pr 01 02 Pr 07 00 Pr 07 04 and Pr 07 06 with correct values 4 After Pr 07 04 is set to 2 the AC motor drive will execute auto tuning immediately after receiving a RUN command Note The motor will run The total auto tune time will be 15 seconds Pr 01 09 01 10 Higher power drives need longer Accel Decel time factory setting is recommended After executing Auto tune Pr 07 04 is set to 0 b After executing please check if there are values filled in Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 If not please press RUN key after setting Pr 07 04 again 6 Then you can set Pr 00 10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application requirement gt rar 1 In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel 2 It is not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of the AC motor drive Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 97 Chapter 4 Parameters The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter The user may also set this parameter witho
98. 07 02 08 This Master Frequency function is also called motor potentiometer Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to increment the AC 12 Counter Trigger drive s internal counter When an input is received the counter is incremented by 1 When active the counter is reset and inhibited To enable 13 Counter Reset counting the input should be OFF Refer to Pr 03 05 and 03 06 Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi function Input 14 External Fault Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to be External Fault E F inputs 4 76 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description 15 PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON the PID function will be disabled disabled AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of 16 Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled If the status of terminal is changed AC motor drive will restart from OHz dm Parameter lock When this setting is enabled all parameters will be locked and enable write parameters is disabled Operation ON Operation command via Ext Terminals Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 18 Selection Pr 02 01 setting external When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the terminals priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation c
99. 0Hz 60Hz Gain 10096 10096220 096 XV Example 4 Use of 0 5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts Instead of adjusting gain as example below you can set Pr 01 00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results Gain adjustment Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 0 adjustment E Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias 30Hz fume Pr 04 02 200 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 5V 100 200 4 70 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Example 5 Use of negative bias in noisy environment In this example a 1V negative bias is used In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin 1V in this example Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 negative bias command 1 Gain 100 Negative bias 6Hz Tov 1v 10V Bias adjustment 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 Example 6 Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range In this example a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached Bias adjustment pr 04 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04
100. 0x1801 O Number 5 RO U8 0x80000280 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 E 11 Appendix E CANopen Function Index Sub Definition Beale RIW Size Unit NOTE 3 Inhibit time o RW Ut6 100us It reor 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 5 Event timer 0 RW 016 1ms 0 jNumber 2 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60410010 RW U32 Ox1A00 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60430010 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1A01 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 Index Sub Definition Eon RW Size Unit Map NOTE Abort connection No action 0x6007 0 2 RW S16 Yes 2 Disable Voltage option code gt 3 Quick stop 0x603F 0 Error code 0 RO U16 Yes bit 0 3 switch status bit 4 rfg enable 0x6040 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes bit 5 rfg unlock bit 6 rfg use ref bit 7 Fault reset BitO Ready to switch on Bit1 Switched on Bit2 Operation enabled Bit3 Fault Bit4 Voltage enabled Bit5 Quick stop Bit6 Switch on disabled 0x6041 0 Status word 0 RO U16 Yes Bit7 Warning Bit8 Bit9 Remote Bit10 Target reached B
101. 1 RC1 Factory Setting 8 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Factory Setting 1 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON 5 Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed Minimum Output Frequency Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to Pr 06 03 4 Over Torque Detection ind VERSIES ed Refer 06 05 Baseblock Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off 5 A during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi function Indication input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected 7 Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal o Active when a fault occurs oc ov oH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF Desired Frequency 1 9 Active when the desired frequency 1 Pr 03 02 is attained Attained Terminal Count Value 10 Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value 11 Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall 12 Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 supervision 4 61 Chapter
102. 1 00 Hz Factory Setting 6 00 Only external terminal JOG MI3 to MI12 can be used When the Jog command is ON the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 to Jog Frequency Pr 01 15 When the Jog command is OFF the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero The used Accel Decel time is set by the Jog Accel Decel time Pr 01 13 Pr 01 14 Before using the JOG command the drive must be stopped first And during Jog operation other operation commands are not accepted except commands via the FORWARD REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad Frequency 01 15 uL Frequency 01 05 Min output frequency e cee AS Joe Soe aed ee dest cis 0 Hz JOG Accel Time JOG Decel Time 4 01 13 01 14 The definition of JOG Accel Decel Time Time 01 16 X Auto Acceleration Deceleration co 4 46 Factory Setting 0 Settings Linear acceleration deceleration Auto acceleration linear Deceleration 0 1 2 Linear acceleration auto Deceleration 3 Auto acceleration deceleration set by load 4 Auto acceleration deceleration set by Accel Decel Time setting With Auto acceleration deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting stopping the load During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to
103. 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 0 25 2HP 0 2 1 5kW Frame A Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Case body Keypad cover Control board case Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 15HP 0 75 11kW Frame B amp C Input terminals cover R L1 S L2 T L3 Keypad cover Case body Control board cover Output terminals cover U T1 V T2 W T3 Internal Structure READY power indicator RUN status indicator e FAULT fault indicator 1 Switch to ON for 50Hz refer to P 01 00 to P01 02 for details 2 Switch to ON for free run to stop refer to P02 02 3 Switch to ON for setting frequency source to ACI P 02 0072 8 Keypad mounting port 8 ACI terminal ACI AVI2 switch 3 NPN PNP Dj E Bic ec Mounting port for extension The LED READY will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors RS485 port RJ 45 discharged to safe voltage levels after power off 1 4 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction RFI Jumper Location Frame B above the nameplate Frame C above the warning label Frame Power range Models 0 25 2hp 0 2 1 5kW VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A
104. 1 Motor Stalls during Acceleration 5 8 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected 5 8 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise 5 9 5 14 Environmental Condition eene 5 9 5 15 Affecting Other Machines ssseee en 5 10 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 6 1 Fault Code Information 6 1 6 1 1 Common Problems and Solutions sese 6 1 6 1 2 iei eR ed ane lee a eee 6 6 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections se m 6 6 Appendix A Specifications esee A 1 Appendix B Accessories B 1 B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives B 1 B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors B 4 B 2 No fuse Circuit Breaker e B 8 Fuse Specification Chart ssssssee emm B 9 B 4 AC Reactor inimene i apa racer ee inane B 10 B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended B 10 B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended B 11 B 4 3 Applications een mme B 12 B 5 Zero Phase Reactor
105. 1 automatically Hiec D 56 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 30 ROR P D n Rotate to the Right Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OF x Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR RORP 5 steps D e e la e n Operands D Device to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions Program Example When XO goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the right as shown in the figure below The bit marked with will be sent to carry flag M1022 H mess Rotate to the right gt upper bit lower bit D10 1791 0 011 01 Tonne pu 4 16bits _ After one rotation to the right a upper bit lower bit M1022 D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 T r a flag API Mnemonic Operands Function 31 ROL P D n Rotate to the Left Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y IM K KnX KnM T C D ROL ROLP 5 steps D xe e n Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW
106. 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 6 The Features and Functions of Counter Features Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up down Settings 0 32 767 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Designate for constant Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D 2 for designated Present value change Counter will stop when attaining settings Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings Output contact When count attains settings contact will be On and latched When count up attains settings contact will be On and latched When count down attains settings contact will reset to Off Reset action The present value will reset to will reset to Off 0 when RST command is executed and contact Present register 16 bits 32 bits Contact action After scanning act together Act immediately when count attains It has no relation with scan period After scanning act together Functions When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On the present value of counter equals to settings and output coil is On Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings 16 bit counters CO C7 1 Setting range of 16 bit counter is KO K32 767 KO is the same as K1 output contact will be On immediately at the first count 2 General
107. 1200 0 Parameter 2 RO U8 COB ID Client gt 0x0000600 1 Server Node ID RO 032 Revision June 2008 O4EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Index Sub Definition RIW Size Unit NOTE COB ID Client 0x0000580 Server Node ID BO 928 Number 2 RO U8 0x00000200 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp 0x1409 2 Transmission 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RO U8 0x80000300 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 0x1401 00 Acyclic amp Synchronous 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60400010 RW U32 0x1600 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60420020 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1601 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 5 RO U8 0x00000180 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 0x1800 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous 3 Inhibit time o RW 1016 100us itus 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 Reserved 5 Event timer 0 RW U16 1ms
108. 14 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running The methods to control the operation direction are method 1 set by the communication parameters Please refer to the group 9 for details Method2 control by the optional keypad KPE LEO2 Refer to Appendix B for details a When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 on the AC motor drive Please use inductance filter Do not use phase compensation capacitors or L C Inductance Capacitance or R C Resistance Capacitance unless approved by Delta DO NOT connect phase compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives Use well insulated motor suitable for inverter operation Terminals B1 B2 for connecting brake resistor BR pc BR 1 1 I O 1 B2 B1 B2 or for models VFDxxExxT Connect brake resistor or brake unit applications with frequent deceleration ramps short deceleration time too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque If the AC motor drive has a built in brake chopper frame frame VFDxxxExxT models connect the external brake resistor to the terminals B1 B2 Models of frame don t have a built in brake chopper Please connect an external optional brake unit BUE series and brake resistor Ref
109. 17 octal Bit 0500 050F T 00 15 Bit word 0600 060F M 000 159 Bit 0800 089F M 1000 1031 Bit OBE8 0C07 0 7 Bit word 0 00 0 07 00 63 Word 1000 101D D 1000 1044 Word 13E8 1414 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 27 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function NOTE when it is in PLC1 mode the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT the device For example address 0400H will correspond to Pr 04 00 NOT D 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 mode Function Code Description Supported Devices 01 Read coil status Y M T C 02 Read input status X Y M T C 03 Read one data T C D 05 Force changing one coil status 06 Write in one data T C D OF Force changing multiple coil status Y M T 10 Write in multiple data T C D D 5 Commands D 5 1 Basic Commands Commands Function Operands LD Load contact A X Y M T C LDI Load contact B X Y M T AND Series connection with A contact X Y Series connection with contact X Y OR Parallel connection with A contact X Y M T C ORI Parallel connection with B contact X Y M T C ANB Series connects the circuit block ORB Parallel connects the circuit block MPS Save the operation result MRD Read the operation result the pointer not moving 7 MPP Read the result i INV Inverter the result D 28 Revision June 2008 04EE SW
110. 2 VFD022E43A 43C 1 262 600W 2000 BR300W400 2 143 1400 Q 5 VFD037E43A 43C 2 080 900W 1330 BR300W400 3 129 960 75 55 VFDOSSE43A 43C mm E 100 BR300W400 4 115 960 10 7 5 VFD075E43A 43C 4 148 1500W 800 BR300W400 5 107 690 15 11 VFD110E43A 43C 6 186 2100W 570 BR300W400 7 100 530 Revision June 2008 O4EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 1 Appendix B Accessories 2 Please select the brake unit and or brake resistor according to the table means no Delta product Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta the warranty will be void Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load Use the contact to switch power off to the AC motor drive When using more than 2 brake units equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can t be less than the value in the column Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive the right most column in the table Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to installation and operation Definition for Brake Usage ED Exp
111. 216 200W 2502 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 170 1000 E 3 VFDOO4E11T 200W 2502 BR200W250 1 170 1000 1 0 75 VFD007E11A 11C 11P 0 427 200W 1500 BR200W150 1 143 800 VFD002E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 2500 025 02 23 23 0 110 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 343 2000 VFD002E21T 23T 200W 2502 BR200W250 1 343 2000 VFD004E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 2502 BR200W250 en Q 0 5 04 23 23 0 216 BUE0015 j1 1 170 Don VFD004E21T 23T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 170 1000 VFD007E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 1500 Q 8 4 23 23 0427 BUE 20015 1 BR200W150 1 143 800 2 VFD007E21T 23T 200W 1500 BR200W150 1 143 800 gt VFD015E21A 21C 300W 850 BR300W100 1 107 400 amp 2 15 VFDO15b23T 0 849 300W 850 BR300W100 1 107 800 VFD015E23A 23C 23P 300W 850 BUE 20015 1 BR300W100 1 107 800 22 VFD022E21A 21C 23A 23C 1 262 600W 500 BR300W100 2 143 400 5 3 7 VFD037E23A 23C 2 080 600W 500 BR300W100 2 85 400 75 055 23 23 3 111 eee BR200W150 4 76 340 10 7 5 VFD075E23A 23C 4 148 1200W 250 BR300W100 4 85 240 o5 YFDO04E43A 43C 43P 0 216 200 4000 BUE 40015 1 BR300W400 1 428 4002 i VFD004E43T 300W 4000 BR300W400 1 428 4000 1 VED007E43A1430 43P 0 427 200W 4000 BUE 40015 1 BR300W400 1 214 2000 gt VFDOO7E43T d 300W 4000 BR300W400 1 214 2000 8 2 15 VFDO15E43A 43C 0 849 400W 3000 BUE 40015 1 BR200W150 2 143 1600 g VFD015E43T i 400W 3000 BR200W150 2 143 1600 z 3 2
112. 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V 2 10 The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled off net in front of the terminal Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage The AC motor drive motor and wiring may cause interference To prevent the equipment damage please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment When the AC drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 respectively To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation switch over any of the two motor leads Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring With long motor cables high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over current high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy To prevent this the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3 7kW models and below And the cable should be less than 50m for 5 5kW models and above For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor The AC motor drive electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor
113. 4EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 33 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO ANB X1 LD Load contact A of XO x2 ORI X2 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Block A Block B LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 OR Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel ANB Connect circuit block in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORB Parallel connection Multiple circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x1 BlockA LD Load contact of i E CO ANI X1 Connect to contact B of X1 in series ORB Block B LDI X2 Load contact B of X2 AND X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in series ORB Connect circuit block in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None D 34 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Explanations Appendix D How to Use PLC Function To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result the result operation pointer pluses 1 Mnemonic Function MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative re
114. 50Hz ase freq 50Hz V F for 220V 50Hz V F for 220V 50Hz Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 7 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive This page intentionally left blank C 8 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function This function is NOT for VFD E C models D 1 PLC Overview D 1 1 Introduction The PLC function built in the VFD E provides following commands WPLSoft basic commands and application commands The operation methods are the same as Delta DVP PLC series D 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor WPLSoft WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP PLC series and VFD E series for WINDOWS Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions such as cut paste copy multi windows WPLSoft also provides various Chinese English comment editing and other special functions e g register editing settings the data readout the file saving and contacts monitor and set etc Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft Item Operation System CPU Memory Hard Disk Monitor Mouse Printer RS 232 port Applicable Models System Requirement Windows 95 98 2000 NT ME XP Pentium 90 and above 16MB and above 32MB and above is recommended Capacity 50MB and above CD ROM for installing WPLSoft Resolution 640x480 16 colors and above It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800x600 Gener
115. 58 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea When Pr 02 07 is set to 1 increase decrease the frequency by acceleration deceleration settings It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running Ea When Pr 02 07 is set to 2 increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 Ea When Pr 02 07 is set to 3 increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 unit pulse input P A Keypad Frequency Command Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command P Communication Frequency Command Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency command The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Save Keypad amp Communication Frequency 1 Save Keypad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only Ea This parameter is used to save keypad or RS 485 frequency command 02 14 Initial Frequency Selection for keypad amp RS485 USB Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By Current Freq Command 1 By Zero Freq Command 2 By Frequency Display at Stop Initial Frequency Setpoint for keypad amp RS485 USB Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop
116. 6 RA6 used by PLC Bit7 1 MO7 RA7 used by PLC Ea The equivalent 8 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital output The value that Pr 03 09 displays is the result after converting 8 bit binary into decimal value Ea For standard AC motor drive it only has 2 bit and bit1 When extension card is installed the number of the digital output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 65 Chapter 4 Parameters used Weights 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Used by PLC Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 o Retay 1 For example when 03 09 is set to 3 decimal 00000011 binary that indicates Relay1 and 1 are used by PLC Pr 03 09 2 2 3 used Weights 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Used by PLC Bit o o o o o o 1 1 4 Relay 1 T mo MO2 RA2 MO3 RA3 MO4 RA4 MO5 RA5 MO6 RA6 MO7 RA7 The Analog Output Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory setting Bit0 1 AFM used by PLC Bit1 1 AO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC The equivalent 1 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog output The value that Pr 03 10 displays is the result after converting 1 bit binary into decimal value 2 0 2 2 2 O not used sige 1 Used by PLC Bt 2
117. 8 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 43 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function PLS Rising edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v v Explanations When X0 OFF ON rising edge trigger PLS command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of MO PLS rising edge output SET LD Load the contact A of MO Timing Diagram SET YO YO latched ON xo 1 1 MO time vo Mnemonic Function PLF Falling edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y Explanations When X0 ON OFF falling edge trigger PLF command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time D 44 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Program Example Ladder diagram Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Command code Operation LD X0 Load A contact of X0 MO PLF MO MO falling edge output LD Load the contact A of MO SET YO YO latched ON Timing Diagram MO scan time YO Mnemonic Function END Program End Operand None Explanations It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or comma
118. B for details 1200 Al1 Function Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IB IB IBI ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 EUN Min AVI3 Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 12 03 Min AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 EUN Max AVI3 Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 4 144 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters ETE Max AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 12 06 Min ACI2 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 1207 Min ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 ETE Max ACI2 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 12 09 Max ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 EXE AI2 Function Selection Factor
119. Basic commands minimum 0 24 us Application commands 10 hundreds us Program Language Instruction Ladder Logic SFC Including the Step commands Program Capacity 500 STEPS SRAM Battery 28 basic commands Commands 45 commands 17 application commands Input Output Contact Input X 6 output Y 2 X0 X17 16 points Correspond to external An octal number system Total is input point 32 Y External Output Relay YO Y17 16 points points Correspond to external octal number system output point MO M159 160 For general points Total is M Auxiliary 192 Contacts can switch to M1000 M1031 32 points 9f in program For special points 3 When the timer E Total is Hone T Timer 100 timer TO T15 16 points 16 EN ET hr points with the same number x will be On 16 bit count up for Total is BH CO C7 8ponts When the counter ES 1 phase input indicated by CNT C Counter T P P command attains the E tting the C tact up down 1 phase 2 C235 1 point need Total is se e C con 7 igh 5 to use with PG card i RE ne same number high 1 point will be On speed 2 phase 2 counter inputs Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 19 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Items Specifications Remarks When timer atta
120. Brake during Start up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts such as fans and pumps Under such circumstances DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position For high inertia loads a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for fast decelerations 08 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Operation stops coast to stop after momentary power loss 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from momentary power loss 08 05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 5 0 sec Factory Setting 2 0 If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting the AC motor drive will resume operation If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time the AC motor drive output is then turned off coast stop The selected operation after power loss in Pr 08 04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is 5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays Lu But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to over
121. Check Pr 01 01 thru Pr 01 0 as expected and torque compensation _No Adjust Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 ettings and lower torque compensation Yes T Y Run in low speed continuously Yes Please use specific motor No Y Is load too large 5 Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive No Vv Check if output voltage of U V W YS__ Motor has malfunction is balanced No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive Of course there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive But this has its limits Therefore solving it from the outside as follows will be the best 1 2 Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independen
122. Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct a Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration a Check if acceleration and deceleration page And if you want to are smooth P estor nn revo id ou v E wv RUNO estor 44 REVO z 27 44 REVO lesroP a amp c c c z E 4 lesroP Fwpe ane nic soz S o um v n REVO u i m estor d lt lt i 2 Pe stor Fwpe revo c lesroP Fwoe REVO na 44 ca If the results of trial run are normal please start the formal run 3 4 ENTER 44 FWDe REVO estor RUNO rwpe REVO lestop ENTER B lt lt 3 Fwpe REVO estor 44 Fwoe REVO lasroP en ca 4 RUNO Fwpe REVO lesroP or 4 u 44 RuNe REVO losroP m wn Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters The VFD E parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting In most applications the user can finish all parameter settings before start up without the need for re adjustment during operation The 14 groups are as follows Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Gr
123. Controller x CANopen webs Display Error Description Error Register Code Code bit 0 7 0001H Over current 7400H 1 ow 0002H Over voltage 7400H 2 oH 0003H Overheating 4310H 3 0005H Overload 2310H 1 ot i 0006H Overload 1 7120H 1 0007H Overload 2 2310H 1 EF 0008H External Fault 9000H 7 oc 0009H Over current during acceleration 2310H 1 000AH Over current during deceleration 2310H 1 000 Over current during constant speed 2310H 1 operation GEE 000CH Ground fault 2240H 1 000DH Lower than standard voltage 3220h 2 PHL OO0EH Phase Loss 3130h 7 bh 000FH External Base Block 9000h 7 codE 0011H Software protection failure 6320h 7 cF 1f 0013H EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed cFelj 0014H Internal EEPROM can not be read 5530h 7 H E 0015H current clamp 5000h 7 HPFg2 0016H OV hardware error 5000h 2 HPF3 0017H GFF hardware error 5000h 2 HPF 4 0018H hardware error 5000h 1 cF 30 0019H error 2300h 1 cF31 001AH V phase error 2300h 1 32 001BH W phase error 2300h 1 cF33 001CH OVorLV 3210h 2 cF34 001DH Temperature sensor error 4310h 3 cE 11 0O01FH Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix E CANopen Function E 10 Controller
124. Customer Setting Read only The Analog Input BitO 1 AVI used by PLC 04 25 sad py PEC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC HH l NOTforVFD E C ed models Bit2 1 Al1 used by PLC Bit3 1 AI2 used by PLC Read only MI1 Status Bit1 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 MI4 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Display the Status of Multi function Bit5 MI6 Status Input Terminal Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status Internal External 0 4095 04 27 Multi function Input Terminals Selection Internal Terminal 0 4095 Group 5 Multi Step Speeds Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Asien TY Customer etting 05 00 1st Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency A05 01 2nd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 15 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer 05 02 3rd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 03 4th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 04 5th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 05 6th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 06 7th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 07 8th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 08 9th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 09 10th Step Speed
125. D E C models 09 12 Group 10 PID Control Parameters Factory 0 Disable PID operation 1 Keypad based on Pr 02 00 PID Set Point 2 0 to 10V from AVI Selection 3 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC Input Terminal for 2 Positive PID feedback from external PID Feedback terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 25 Chapter 4 Parameters 7 Factory 10 02 eae Gain 0 0 to 10 0 10 03 Integral Time I 0 00 to 100 0 sec 0 00 0 00 to 100 0 sec 0 00 disable 410 04 Control 0 00 to 1 00 sec imus ES Upper Bound for 10 05 Integral Control 0 to 100 100 10 06 Primary Delay Filter o 9 to 2 5 sec poo Time 10 07 Output Freq o to 110 DIEM Limit PID Feedback Signal Detection 0 0 to 3600 sec 0 0 disable Time 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the Erroneous PID 1 Warn and COAST to stop Feedback Signals 2 Warn and keep operation Gain Over the PID Source of PID Set 0 00 to 600 0Hz 10 12 PID Offset Level 1 0 to 50 0 Detection Time of Sleep Wake Up 10 15 Sleep Frequency 000t96000H2 00 to 600 0 Hz 10 16 Wakeup Frequency 0 00 to 600 0 Hz PORE
126. D110E43C Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 21 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring This page intentionally left blank 2 22 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Make sure that the wiring is correct In particular check that the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 are NOT connected to power CAUTION and that the drive is well grounded Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands Please check if READY LED is ON when power is applied Check if the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KPE LEO2 It should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to Fault Code Information and Maintenance for solution Please do WARNING NOT touch output terminals U V W when power is still applied to L1 R L2 S L3 T even when the AC motor drive has stopped The DC link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels even if the power has been turned off 3 1 Keypad There are three LEDs on the keypad LED READY It will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off LED RUN It will light up when the motor is running LED FAULT It will light up when fault occurs Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 3 1 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 2 Operation Metho
127. DELTA ELECTRONICS INC User Manual 4 4 SEE Power Range 1 phase 115V series 0 2 0 75kW 0 25 1HP 1 phase 230V series 0 2 2 2kW 0 25 3HP 3 phase 230V series 0 2 7 5kW 0 25 10HP 3 phase 460V series 0 4 11kW 0 50 15HP A MELTA DELTA ELECTRONICS INC www delta com tw industrialautomation ASIA Delta Electronics Inc Taoyuan1 31 1 Xingbang Road Guishan Industrial Zone Taoyuan County 33370 Taiwan R O C TEL 886 3 362 6301 FAX 886 3 362 7267 Delta Electronics Jiang Su Ltd Wujiang Plant3 1688 Jiangxing East Road Wujiang Economy Development Zone Wujiang City Jiang Su Province People s Republic of China Post code 215200 TEL 86 512 6340 3008 FAX 86 512 6340 7290 Delta Electronics Japan Inc Tokyo Office Delta Shibadaimon Building 2 1 14 Shibadaimon Minato Ku Tokyo 105 0012 Japan TEL 81 3 5733 1111 FAX 81 3 5733 1211 Delta Electronics Korea Inc 234 9 Duck Soo BD 7F Nonhyun dong Kangnam ku Seoul Korea Post code 135 010 TEL 82 2 515 5303 5 FAX 82 2 515 530 Delta Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 8 Kaki Bukit Road 2 04 18 Ruby Warehouse Complex Singapore 417841 TEL 65 6747 5155 FAX 65 6744 9228 Delta Energy Systems India Pvt Ltd Plot No 27 amp 31 Sector 34 EHTP Gurgaon 122001 Haryana India TEL 91 124 4169040 FAX 91 124 4036045 AMERICA Delta Products Corporation USA Raleigh Office P O Box 12173 5101 Davi
128. E tee toe ene Ee re iens B 36 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor C 1 C 1 Capacity Formulas issis emere C 2 C 2 General Precaution eerte treten rete nes C 4 How to Choose a Suitable C 5 Appendix D How to Use PLC D 1 DA e D 1 DAT D 1 D 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor 0 D 1 D 2 Start up 322r teretes cea Hon tee ei edes HEC epe dedecus D 2 0 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution D 2 0 2 2 Device Reference D 3 0 2 3 WPLSoft Installation seem D 4 D 2 4 Program D 5 0 2 5 Program Download sss D 5 D 2 6 Program MOnItOF 2 eine ere i desee rei hae ae D 6 D 2 7 The Lirnit of PLQ sceneries tenete eee ies D 6 D 3 Ladder Diagram onte tate dne bereit D 8 0 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram D 8 D 3 2 Introduction eoe e eden D 8 0 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder D 11 0 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program
129. EB Function Settings 0 Disable Factory Setting 0 1 Enable DEB Return Time Unit 1 Settings 0 250 sec Factory Setting 0 The DEB Deceleration Energy Backup function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss When the momentary power loss occurs this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method When the power is on again motor will run again after DEB return time for high speed axis application Status 1 Insufficient power supply due to momentary power loss unstable power due to low voltage sudden heavy load DC BUS voltage The level for DEB return time Lv 30V 58V The level for soft start relay to be ON Lv 30 T 1 itdoesn t need multi function terminals 1 1 Lv level power side R 1 DEB function is activated ue cj 1 1 Output frequency Pr 07 13 Decel time selection for T momentary power loss IN 1 1 1 DEB return time PrE When Pr 07 14 is set to 0 the AC motor drive will be stopped and won t re start at the power on again Status 2 unexpected power off such as momentary power loss 4 110 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters DC BUS voltage The level for DEB return time Lv 30V 58V NTT The level for soft start relay to be ON Lv 30 Lv level power side 1 Out
130. ELD Shield 12345 4 CAN H Signal 5 Reserved Baud Rate Setting UE Rotary switch BR sets up the communication speed on 29 CANopen network hex Setup range 0 7 8 F are ov l forbidden BR B 32 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Example If you need to set up the communication speed of CME COP01 as 500K simply switch BR to 5 BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate 0 10K 4 250K 1 20K 5 500K 2 50K 6 800K 3 125K 7 1 MAC ID Setting o1 8 9 6 89 Rotary switches ID_L and ID_H set up the hi y 2 ja Node ID on CANopen network in hex Setup ox range 00 7F 80 FF are forbidden Rd ID H ID L Example If you need to set up the communication address of CME COP01 as 26 1AH simply switch ID H to 1 and ID L to A Switch Setting Content 0 Valid CANopen MAC ID setting Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting B 10 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting There are LED indicators RUN ERROR and SP on CME COP01 to indicate the communication status of CME COPO1 RUN LED LED Status State Indication OFF No power No power on CME COP01 card Single Flash dd STOPPED CME COPO is in STOPPED state Green Blinking CME COP01 is in the PRE Green OPERATIONAL state CME COP01 is in the Green ON OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL state Red ON Configuration error Node ID or Baud
131. External Base Parameter value 09 programs a Multi function Input Terminals for external Base Block control NOTE When a Base Block signal is received the AC motor 9 Block drive will block all output and the motor will free run When Refer to Pr 08 06 base block control is deactivated the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed and then accelerate to Master Frequency 18 UP Increase Increase decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active When both inputs are active at the same time the Master Frequency 41 DOWN Decrease increase decrease is halted Please refer to Pr 02 07 02 08 This Master Frequency function is also called motor potentiometer Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI7 MI12 Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to increment the 12 Counter Trigger i drive s internal counter When an input is received the counter is incremented by 1 When active the counter is reset and inhibited To enable 13 Counter Reset counting the input should be OFF Refer to Pr 03 05 and 03 06 Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi function Input 14 External Fault Terminals MI7 MI12 Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to be External Fault E F inputs 15 PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON the PID function will be disabled disabled AC moto
132. FF 1st Frequency command source ON Run PLC Program OFF Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC is Run Stop PLC program When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the 4 142 Program PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can download execute monitor PLC When this function is disabled it Download Execute 24 Monitor PLC Program PLC2 will display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 143 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix
133. FF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON 4 89 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 6 Protection Parameters 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 330 0 to 410 0V Factory Setting 390 0 460V series 660 0 to 820 0V Factory Setting 780 0 0 Disable Over voltage Stall Prevention with brake unit or brake resistor During deceleration the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration When this function is enabled the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again M Over Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled Pr 06 00 0 when a brake unit or brake resistor is used gt With moderate inertia load over voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads If the deceleration time is critical for the application a brake resistor or brake unit should be used high voltage at DC side over voltage detection level time output frequency Frequency
134. FLA to 120 FLA FLA 07 33 Motor No Load Current Motor 3 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA A 07 34 Torque Compensation Motor 3 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 A 07 35 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 07 36 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 0 65535 mQ 07 37 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 07 38 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 2to 10 Group 8 Special Parameters Factory acti Setting 08 00 DC Brake Current 0 to 100 Level DC Brake Time 08 01 during Start Up 0 0 to 60 0 sec 0 0 to 60 0 sec 0 00 to 600 0Hz 08 02 08 03 DC Brake Time during Stopping Start Point for DC Brake Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 21 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Operation stops after momentary power loss Momentary Power 1 Operation continues after momentary Loss Operation power loss speed search starts with the Selection Master Frequency reference value 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency Maximum Allowable 0 Disable speed search Base block Speed 1 Speed search starts with last frequency 1 Search command 2 Starts with minimum output frequency 08 07 B B Time for Speed p 4 to 5 0 sec pos Search Current Limit for 08 09 Skip Frequency 1 9 99 to 600 0 Hz Upp
135. Held Deceleration characteristic when Over Voltage Stall N Prevention enabled N previous deceleration time n actual time to decelerate to stop when over voltage stall prevention is enabled 4 90 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit 1 Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable setting of 100 is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive Ea During acceleration the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr 06 01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor When this function is enabled the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value 06 01 Over Current lt output current Detection um Level setting frequency Over Current Stall prevention during Acceleration Output frequency held Frequenc meee eee time 1 1 1 Li actual acceleration time when over current stall prevention is enabled a P previous acceleration time ETE Over current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit 1 Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable Ea If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr 06 02 when the drive is operating
136. How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3 phase induction motor take the following precautions 1 The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor 2 Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time Under this condition the motor temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor s fan Consider external forced motor cooling 3 When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time the output load must be decreased 4 The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows Load duty cycle 50 P d continuous L 9 36 20 60 Frequency Hz 5 If 10096 continuous torque is required at low speed it may be necessary to use a special inverter duty motor 6 Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed exceeds the rated speed 60Hz of a standard motor Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 5 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 6 T Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply drives the motor Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series pay attention to the following motor vibration problems Resonant mechanical vibration anti vibration damping rubbers should be used t
137. How to Use PLC Function D 3 Ladder Diagram D 8 D 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Read input state from outside 1 Start Calculate the result by ladder p diagram algorithm it doesn t M100 X3 X10 sent to the outer output point aD but the inner equipment will output immediately Execute in cycles X100 M505 t End Send the result to the output point D 3 2 Introduction Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel such as button switch relay timer counter and etc The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit such as relay coil and contact It doesn t have the real components in it In PLC it just has a basic unit of internal memory If this bit is 1 it means the coil is ON and if this bit is O it means the coil is OFF You should read the c
138. Minimum PID 0 By PID control Output Frequency Selection 1 By minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card 4 26 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 11 05 11 06 11 07 Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Multi function Output Terminal Multi function Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Multi function Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Multi function Output Terminal MO6 RA6 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation rau TY Customer Setting No function AC drive operational Master frequency attained Zero speed Over torque detection Base Block B B indication Low voltage indication Operation mode indication Fault indication Desired frequency 1 attained Terminal count value attained Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current Stall supervision Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision 17 Forward command 18 Reverse command 19 Zero speed output signal 2 2 2 2 0 1 2 3 4 0 Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE 1 Brake control Desired frequency attained 2 Drive ready 3 Desired frequency 2 attained No function Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi Step speed command 4
139. PID function is disabled S270 S3 1 unit 0 01 seconds and S4 1 unit 0 01 seconds 2 Assume that when M1 ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled S271 unit 0 01 53 0 and S4 0 3 Assume that when M2 ON S1 is set to 1 frequency is inputted by digital keypad S271 unit 0 01 S320 and S4 0 4 D1027 frequency command controlled by PID D 62 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M1 M2 M1000 MO API Mnemonic Operands Function 142 FREQ 1 S2 S3 Operation control of the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x Y mM KJ KnX KnY D FREQ FREQP 7 steps 1 S2 S3 Operands S1 frequency command S2 acceleration time S3 deceleration time Explanation 1 This command can control frequency command acceleration time and deceleration time of the AC motor drive Please use M1025 to RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive and use M1025 to control the operation direction FWD ON REV OFF Program Example 1 M1025 RUN ON STOP Off the AC motor drive M1026 operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON M1015 frequency is reached 2 When M10 ON setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300 3 00Hz and acceleration deceleration time is 0 3 When M11 ON setting frequency command of
140. RUN OPEN FWD CLOSE REV RUN STOP FWD REV 4 ee Mle DCM Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 04 04 N 3 wire External Terminal STOP RUN 2 MI1 MI3 MI2 CLOSE RUN OPEN STOP OPEN FWD CLOSE REV REV FWD DCM Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Factory Setting 1 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Factory Setting 2 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Factory Setting 3 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Factory Setting 4 Settings Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they 0 No Function have no effect on operation Multi Step Speed 1 Command 1 These four inputs select the multi speed defined by Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table Multi Step Speed Command 2 NOTE Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 can also be used to control output 3 Multi Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive s internal PLC Command 3 function There are 17 step speed frequencies including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency to select for Multi Step Speed application Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad After faults such as O H O C and O V are cleared this input can be used t
141. Reserved 01010 Present scan time Unit 0 1ms 01011 Minimum scan time Unit 0 1ms 01012 scan time Unit 0 1ms Reserved _ D1020 Output frequency R D1021 Output current R The ID of the extension card 02 USB Card 03 12 Bit A D 2CH 12 Bit D A 2CH D1022 04 Relay Card 2C R 05 Relay Card 3A 06 3IN 3OUT Card 07 PG Card ee Reserved D 26 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Special D Function Read R Write W D1025 The present value of the high speed counter C235 low byte R D1026 The present value of the high speed counter C235 high byte R D1027 Frequency command of the PID control R D1028 The value of AVI analog voltage input 0 10V corresponds to 0 R 1023 The value of ACI analog current input 4 20mA corresponds to 0 D1029 1023 or the value of AVI2 analog voltage input 0 10V R corresponds to 0 1023 D1030 The value of V R digital keypad 0 10V corresponds to 0 1023 R D1031 D1035 Reserved D1036 PLC error code R D1037 D1039 Reserved D1040 Analog output value R W D1041 D1042 Reserved D1043 User defined when Pr 00 04 is set to 2 the register data will be R W displayed as C xxx 01044 High speed counter mode R W D 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode Device Range Type Address Hex 00 17 octal Bit 0400 040F Y 00
142. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile CiA DS301 as well as a framework for programmable devices CiA 302 recommendations for cables and connectors CiA 303 1 and SI units and prefix representations CiA 303 2 Device Profile CiA DSP 401 Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA DSP 404 DSP XXX OSI Layer 7 Application OSI Layer 2 Data Link Layer OSI Layer 1 Physical Layer E 2 Communication Profile CiA DS 301 CAN Controller CAN 2 0A ISO 11898 CAN bus Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 E 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 8 1 8 1 socket plug PIN Signal Description 1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line dominant high 2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line dominant low 3 CAN_GND Ground OV V 4 SG 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V E 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set To reduce configuration effort for simple networks CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation scheme The 11 bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows COB Identifier CAN Iden
143. act result Coil A contact normally open B contact normally closed FALSE OFF Non continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non continuity D 36 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Program Example Ladder diagram Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Command code Operation x1 LDI Load contact B of X0 C X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function SET Latch ON X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y is Explanations When the SET command is driven its specific device is set to be ON which will keep ON whether the SET command is still driven You can use the RST command to set the device to OFF Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation YO LD Load contact A of X0 H ANI YO Connect to contact B of YO in series SET Y1 Y1 latch ON Mnemonic Function RST Clear the contacts or the registers X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand P Y Y v v B D 37 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations When the RST command is driven motion of its specific device is as follows Device Status Y M Coil and contact will be set to OFF Present values of the timer or counter T C will be set to 0 and the coil and
144. actory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVR function enabled 1 AVR function disabled 2 AVR function disabled for deceleration 3 AVR function disabled for stop The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V 200VAC 50Hz 60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz 60Hz Therefore when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12 20 its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature failing insulation and unstable torque output 4 108 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum Output Voltage Pr 01 02 For instance if Pr 01 02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC Ea When the motor ramps to stop the deceleration time is longer When setting this parameter to 2 with auto acceleration deceleration the deceleration will be quicker 08 19 Software Brake Level Unit 0 1 the Action Level of the Brake resistor Settings 115 230V series 370 0 to 430 0V Factory Setting 380 0 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V Factory Setting 760 0 Ea This parameter sets the DC bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated T
145. aintenance Fault Name Fault Descriptions cea ctc Ground fault Auto accel decel failure TL 7 Communication Error a dE Software protection failure r r Analog signal error EBRE PID feedback signal error PHL Phase Loss gue muse Auto Tuning Error Communication time out 4 error on the control board or power board Motor overheat protection PG signal error CANopen Guarding Time out Only for VFDxxxExxC Omer 6 4 Corrective Actions When one of the output terminal s is grounded short circuit current is more than 50 of AC motor drive rated current the AC motor drive power module may be damaged NOTE The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive protection not for protection of the user 1 Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged 2 Check for possible poor insulation at the output line Check if the motor is suitable for operation by AC motor drive Check if the regenerative energy is too large Load may have changed suddenly Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins Check if the communication protocol address transmission speed etc are properly set Use the correct checksum calculation Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information Return to the factory Check the wiring of ACI 1 Check parameter settings Pr 10 01
146. al mouse or the device compatible with Windows Printer with Windows driver At least one of COM1 to COMB can be connected to PLC All Delta DVP PLC series and VFD E series Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 1 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 2 Start up D 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC function by the following five steps 1 Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download upload A Go to PLCO page by pressing the MODE key B Change to PLC2 by pressing the UP key and then press the ENTER key after confirmation C If succeeded END is displayed and back to PLC2 after one or two seconds Eu Disable RunPLC Read write PLC program into AC drives gt ea You don t need to care about the PLC warning such as PLod PLSv and PIdA before downloading a program to VFD E 2 Connection Please connect RJ 45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485 to RS232 converter 3 Run the program The PLC status will always be PLC2 even if the AC motor drive is switched off There are three ways to operate PLC A In PLC1 page execute PLC program B In PLC2 page execute stop PLC program by using WPL software C After setting multi function input terminals MI3 to MI9 to 23 RUN STOP PLC it will display PLC1 for executing PLC when the terminal is ON It will display PLCO to stop PLC program when terminals are OFF When external terminals are
147. all connections correct B No loose wires C No short circuits between terminals or to ground Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 1 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Amen A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive 2 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation wiring and commissioning 3 Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock 2 1 Wiring Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS 485 communication port or permanent damage may result The pins 1 amp 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS 485 communication 2 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Figure 1 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E11A 21A VFD004E11A 21A VFD007E21A VFD002E11C 21C VFD004E11C 21C VFD007E21C VFD002E11P 21P VFD004E11P 21P VFD007E21P Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring BR _ resistor 1 optional BUE rake unit optional Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker
148. ameter determines the AC motor drive s Maximum Output Frequency All the motor drive frequency command sources analog inputs 0 to 10V and 4 to 20mA are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v f curve ratio For example if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7 66 V Hz 460V 60Hz 7 66V Hz This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Frequency Pr 01 03 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive The Maximum Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Voltage Pr 01 04 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 This parameter sets the Mid Point Frequency of the V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Min
149. and AVI ACI wiring 2 Check for possible fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time Pr 10 08 Check input phase wiring for loose contacts Check cabling between drive and motor Retry again NA 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting 2 Return to the factory 1 Check if the motor is overheat 2 Check Pr 07 12 to Pr 07 17 settings Check the wiring of PG card 2 Try another PG card Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance ane Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions r CANopen Heartbeat Time out Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus GET Only for VEDxxxExxC r cu CANopen SYNC Time out Check if CANopen synchronous message is 23 Only for VEDxxxExxC abriormal x CANopen SDO Time out Check if command channels are full 4 3 Only for VFDxxxExxC CANopen SDO buffer 1 Too short time between commands please check SDO message sent from the master 2 Reset CAN bus overflow Only for VFDxxxExxC 1 Check if it connects to terminal resistor rage jp n id 2 Check if the signal is abnormal 3 Check if the master is connected 1 CAN Boot up fault Only for Check if the master is connected VEDxxxExxC Reset bus Error communication protocol C Pi o of CANopen Only for Check if the communica
150. ar C235 please set M1029 ON D 58 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 3 4 n a Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Please use rising edge falling edge command such as LDP LDF for the contact condition Please notice that error may occur when using contact A B for the contact condition There are three input modes for high speed counter in the following can be set by D1044 A B phase mode 4 times frequency D1044 0 user can input the A and B pulse for counting Make sure that A B and GND are grounding FEY Count up all edges Count down all edges e v d v Count up all edges Count down all edges Pulse signal mode D1044 1 user can count by pulse input or signal A is for pulse and B is for signal Make sure that A and GND are grounding Pulse flag mode D1044 2 user can count by M1030 Only A is needed for this mode and make sure that A and GND are grounding Program Example 1 Assume that when M100 ON it is set to phase mode When M101 ON it is set to pulse signal mode When M102 ON it is set to pulse flag mode M1030 is used to set to count up OFF and count down ON If MO goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 2 to H 3 or from H 4 to H 3 M3 will be always be ON If M1 goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of hig
151. ard operation disabled Factory Setting 0 Ea This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 55 Chapter 4 Parameters 02 05 Line Start Lockout Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Ka This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command Source is changed Operation status when operation Pr 02 05 Start lockout Run when power is ON command source is changed 0 Disable AC motor drive will run Keep previous status 1 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run Keep previous status 2 Disable AC motor drive will run Change according new operation command source 3 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run Cnange according to operation command source aa When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON MI1 MI2 DCM closed the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 after power is applied For terminals MI1 and MI2 only
152. as been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the B 7 3 Operation Flow Chart VFD PU06 Operation Flow Chart press RIGHT number Press UP DOWN key to change frequency commands LEFT key to adjust MODE x MODE MODE MODE MODE um Press UP key to select SAVE or READ Press PROG DATA for about 2 seconds or until it is flashing then save parameters from PUOG to AC drive or read parameters from AC drive to PUOG 1 PROG MODE m T_T BBD Adjust XXXXXF 4 5 Numbe PROG 2 A Vv o 3 gt o c ERR Succeed to write in Write in Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 17 Appendix B Accessories B 8 KPE LE02 B 8 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE LE02 STOP 7 RESET Q Status Display UP and DOWN Key Display the driver s current status Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency LED Display MODE Indicates frequency voltage current user Change between different display mode defined units and etc Potentiometer STOP RESET For master Frequency setting Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive a
153. ate the Digital Keypad START b HH gt i HH gt Ee f LLU D u a a 00 e GO START NOTE Inthe selection mode press to set the parameters m End z ES gt Bil Success to Input data error set parameter NOTE In the parameter setting mode you can press Exil to return the selecting mode shift data START C3 Setting PLC Mode E gt unn BEBE enter PLC2 mode _ gt enter PLC1 mode B 20 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 8 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad Digit 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 LED n 2 I uje n a Display L 1 2 2 English LED ms Z noun moa Display 1 a English alphabet L n Oo P q r amp m w LED wise in a u Z mL n Display L noun 1 2 English alphabet M Y 2 LED T Display Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 22 Appendix B Accessories B 9 Extension Card For details please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download from our website http www delta com tw industrialautomation Installation method B 9 1 Relay Card EME R2CA Relay Output
154. before Off Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function MO If C10 K10 M0 On M1 I If K10 lt C10 lt K100 M1 On M2 If C10 gt K100 M2 On 3 To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction Operands Function 12 MOV P S D Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K H kny KnM T C D MOV MOVP 5 steps D E Operands S Source of data D Destination of data Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 When this instruction is executed the content of S will be moved directly to D When this instruction is not executed the content of D remains unchanged Program Example MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16 bit data 1 When Off the content in D10 will remain unchanged If XO On the value K10 will be moved to D10 data register 2 When X1 Off the content in D10 will remain unchanged If X1 On the present value TO will be moved to D10 data register Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 49 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function X0 MOV 10 DO x1 MOV TO D10 API Mnemonic O
155. by PLC For standard motor drive without extension the equivalent 6 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital input The value for Pr 04 24 to display is the result after converting 6 bit binary into decimal value Weights 25 2 9 2 9 2 O notused 1 used by PLC Bit MM For example when Pr 04 24 is set to 52 decimal 110100 binary that indicates MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC 4 82 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea When extension card is installed the number of the digital input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown as follows O not used Weights 2 2 s 22 2 22 2 2 2 2 15Usedby PLC Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 The Analog Input Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory setting Display Bit0 1 AVI used by PLC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 Al1 used by PLC Bit3 1 Al2 used by PLC Ea The equivalent 2 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog input The value for Pr 04 25 to display is the result after converting 2 bit binary into decimal value Weights 9 2 9 9 O notused 1 used by PLC st sz Jo 4 ACI AVI2 AI1 optional AI2 optional Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 83
156. cation protocol in Pr 09 04 Code Description The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset Therefore there is at least 1 second delay time in master station ASCII mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters For example a 1 byte data 64 Hex shown as 64 in ASCII consists of 6 36Hex and 4 34Hex Character 0 T 2 E 4 5 6 T ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 113 Chapter 4 Parameters Character 8 9 B C D E F ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H RTU mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two 4 bit hexadecimal characters For example 64 Hex 2 Data Format 10 bit character frame For ASCII 7 N 2 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop Stop i i i i i bit bit i 7 bit character SS gt i M 10 bit character frame gt 7 1 01471214314 5 Een Stop LOEO bit 7 bit character i 4 10 bit character frame o gt 44 7 bit character f amp 4 10 bit character frame gt 7 N 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 lt _ 7 bit character lt ___ 9 bit character frame gt i Even Sto St
157. cause confusion please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers When S gt D the BMOV command is processed the order as 0 Q G X10 L 8Mov p20 D19 020 L gt Dig D21 gt D20 D22 9 p21 When S lt D the BMOV command is processed the order as G Q D X11 9 m I p10 D11 Q be gt D12 2 p13 API Mnemonic Operands Function 20 ADD P 4 S2 D Addition Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OP x Y M K H kny c ADD ADDP 7 steps s gt S2 aol e alele D zs pes Operands S1 Summand 52 Addend D Sum Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 51 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D 3 The highest bit is symbolic bit O and 1 which is suitable for algebraic addition e g 3 9 6 4 Flag changes in binary addition 16 bit command A If the operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C Ifthe operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example 1 16 bit command When On
158. ceives communication command as shown in the following 1 unit 2 msec RS485 BUS Response Message of AC Drive PC or PLC command Handling time of AC drive Max 6msec wTransmission Speed for USB Card Factory Setting 2 Response Delay Time Pr 09 07 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps 4 Baud rate 57600 bps Ea This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card ETE Communication Protocol for USB Card Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt 2 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt 3 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt 4 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt 5 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt 6 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt 7 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt 8 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt 9 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt gt Revision June 2008 04 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 129 Chapter 4 Parameters 09 10 A Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Factory Setting 0 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating Settings This parameter is set to how to react when transmission errors
159. components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands 3 Only qualified persons are allowed to install wire and maintain AC motor drives 1 Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power 2 DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature direct sunlight high humidity excessive vibration corrosive gases or liquids or airborne dust or metallic particles 3 Only use AC motor drives within specification Failure to comply may result in fire explosion or electric shock 4 To prevent personal injury please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment 5 When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor Refer to appendix B Reactor for details 6 Therated voltage for AC motor drive must be x 240V x 480V for 460V models and the short circuit must be lt 5000A RMS x10000A RMS for the gt 40hp 30kW models DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc Lonwork is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus International CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation CiA Other trademarks belong to their respective owners Table of Contents
160. contact will be set to OFF D The content value will be set to 0 Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation H LD Load contact A of XO RST Y5 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function TMR 16 bit timer T K TO T15 KO K32 767 Operand T D TO T15 DO D29 Explanations When TMR command is executed the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count When the setting value of timer is attained counting value gt setting value the contact will be as following NO Normally Open contact Open collector NC Normally Closed contact Close collector Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of X0 T5 timer H TMR T5 K1000 TMR T5K1000 Setting is K1000 D 38 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function CNT 16 bit counter C K C0 C7 K0 K32 767 Operand C D C0 C7 00 029 Explanations 1 When the CNT command is executed from OFF ON which means that the counter coil is driven and 1 should thus be added to the counter s value when the counter achieved specific set value value of counter the setting value motion of the contact is as follows NO Normally Open contact Continuity NC Normally Closed contact Non continuity 2 If there is counting pulse input after counting
161. counter will be clear when PLC is power loss If counter is latched it will remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss 3 If using MOV command WPLSoft to send a value which is large than setting to CO register at the next time that X1 is from Off to On CO counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings 4 The setting of counter can use constant K or register D not includes special data register D1000 D1044 to be indirect setting 5 If using constant K to be setting it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D it can be positive negative number The next number that counter counts up from 32 767 is 32 768 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 23 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example LD RST CO 0 LD xt x1 CNT CO K5 CNT CO K5 CO OUT YO 1 When X0 On RST command is executed reset to 0 and output contact reset to Off 2 When X1 is from Off to On lt 1 counter will count up add 1 K5 CO contact is On and CO present setting K5 CO won t accept X1 value trigger signal and CO remains K5 I 1 1 3 When counter attains settings CO 1 1 1 1 Contacts YO CO 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter C235 1 Setting range of 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter is K 2 147 483 648 K2 147 483
162. ct the slip compensation E The setting value must be less than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current 07 02 X Torque Compensation Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 This parameter be set so that the drive will increase its voltage output to obtain higher torque Only to be used for V f control mode m M Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 While driving an asynchronous motor increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause increase in slip and decrease in speed This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no load current Pr 07 01 the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter 4 96 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 07 04 Motor Parameters Auto Tuning Unit 1 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Auto Tuning R1 motor doesn t run 2 Auto Tuning R1 No load Test with running motor Ea Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2 When set to 1 it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr 07 01 must be input manually When set to 2 the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr 07 01 and Pr 07
163. cutting the RFI jumper Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi pot tests are performed The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high To prevent drive damage the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system or a corner grounded TN system 1 1 5 Remove Instructions Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Remove Keypad Remove Front Cover 1 Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover Pull the cover up to release Step 1 Step 2 Remove RST Terminal Cover Remove UVW Terminal Cover For Frame B and Frame C For Frame B and Frame C For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be wired directly wired directly Remove Fan Remove Extension Card Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions 10 50 C 14 122 F for UL amp cUL 10 40 C 14 104 F for side by side mounting Relative Humidity lt 90 no condensation allowed Atmosphere Operation pre
164. d Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection Any missing characters Visual inspection hanical parts Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year E I5 any abnormal sourd Visual and aural inspection or vibration If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws If any part is deformed or x damaged Visual inspection If there is any color change by Visual inspection overheating If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there are any loose or missing Tighten or replace the screw screws If machine or insulator is Visual inspection deformed cracked damaged or with changed color change due NOTE Please ignore the color to overheating or ageing change of copper plate If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection 6 8 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Terminals and wiring of main circuit Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due Visual inspection to overheat
165. d 2106H Reserved 2107H Reserved 2108H DC BUS Voltage UXXX X 2109H Output voltage EXXX X 210AH Display temperature of IGBT C 2116H User defined Low word 2117H User defined High word Note 2116H is number display of Pr 00 04 High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr 00 04 3 6 Exception response The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error thus the AC motor drive has no response The master device will eventually process a timeout condition The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error but cannot handle them An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message CExx will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive The xx of is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below In the exception response the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1 and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned Example of an exception response of command code O6H and exception code 02H ASCII mode RTU mode Revi
166. d The operation method can be set via communication control terminals and optional keypad KPE LEO2 RS485 port RJ 45 It needs to use VFD USB01 or IFD8500 converter to connect tothe PC Control terminals MI1 to MI6 Keypad mounting port 3 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Operation Method Operation Command Frequen ur cues Sue Source When setting communication by the PC it needs to use VFD USBO1 or Operate from the IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC communication NN Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details FWD Stop Factory setting REV Sto ig 1 NPN Mode D MI2 Factory 4 Multi step 1 MI3 y settin i Ln 9 Mult step 2 MIA Multi step 3 5 5 MI5 Multi step 4 55 MI6 Digital Signal Common DCM EO Don t apply the mains voltage directly to above terminals O 10V Operate from 3 Power supply external signal pun setting 1 10V 3mA ACI Mode bd 5KQ 2 QAVI AVI Master Frequency NEZ 1 0to 10V 47K ACI ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V When switching to AVI ACM it indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common T Figure 3 1 External terminals input MI1 DCM MI2 DCM STOP RESET MI3 DCM Set Pr 04 05 10 MI4 DCM Set Pr 04 06 11 Operate from the optional keypad KPE LE02
167. dder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment m Normally open contact LD X Y M T C Normally closed contact b LDI X Y M T C 4 Serial normally open AND X Y M T C J Parallel normally open OR X Y M T C Parallel normally closed ORI X Y M T C Ht Rising edge trigger switch LDP X Y M T C he Falling edge trigger switch LDF X Y M T I rD Rising edge trigger in serial ANDP X Y MT C H na A A Falling edge trigger in serial ANDF X Y M T C Rising edge trigger in parallel ORP X Y M T Falling edge trigger in parallel ORF X Y M T T Block in serial ANB none Block in parallel ORB none I D 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment MPS Multiple output MRD none MPP gt Output command of coil drive OUT Y M S Basic command Application Application Please refer to basic command command command application command Inverse logic INV none D 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line the right power line will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft After editing a row go to editing the next row The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts If you need more than 11 contacts you co
168. ddress of COM1 the address offset value relative to COM1 define THR 0 0000 define RDR 0 0000 define BRDL 0x0000 define IER 0x0001 define BRDH 0x0001 define LCR 0x0003 define MCR 0x0004 define LSR 0x0005 define MSR 0x0006 unsigned char rdat 60 read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 unsigned char tdat 60 0 1 0 3 2 1 0 2 0 0 02 D 7 rn void main int i outportb PORT MCR 0x08 interrupt enable outportb PORT IER 0x01 interrupt as data in outportb PORT LCR inportb PORT LCR 0x80 the BRDL BRDH can be access as LCR b7 1 outportb PORT BRDL 12 set baudrate 9600 12 115200 9600 outportb PORT BRDH 0x00 outportb PORT LCR 0x06 set protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 06H lt 7 E 1 gt 1AH lt 7 0 1 gt 0AH lt 8 N 2 gt 07H lt 8 E 1 gt 1BH lt 8 0 1 gt 0BH for i 0 i lt 16 i while inportb PORT LSR amp 0x20 wait until THR empty outportb PORT THR tdat i send data to THR j i 0 while kbhit if inportb PORT LSR amp 0x01 0 1 read data ready rdat i inportb PORT RDR read data form RDR ipu osos Reserved 4 128 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters P Reserved 0907 Response Delay Time Unit 2ms Settings 0 200 400msec Factory Setting 1 Ea This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive re
169. does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this condition It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 57 Chapter 4 Parameters 02 06 Loss of ACI Signal 4 20mA Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Decelerate to OHz 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 2 Continue operation by the last frequency command LL This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost When set to 1 it will display warning message on the keypad in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting When ACI signal is recovered the warning message will stop blinking Please press RESET key to clear it 02 07 Up Down Mode Factory Setting 0 0 By digital keypad up down keys mode 1 Based on Accel Decel Time acc to Pr 01 09 to 01 12 2 Constant speed acc to Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit acc to Pr 02 08 Accel Decel Rate of Change of UP DOWN Operation with Unit 0 01 02 08 Constant Speed Settings Settings 0 01 10 00 Hz 2ms Factory Setting 0 01 These parameters determine the increase decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi function Inputs when Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 are set to 10 Up command or 11 Down command 84 When 02 07 is set to 0 increase decrease the frequency by using UP DOWN key It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running t sec 4
170. dule CME LW01 B 26 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 1 Introduction Device CME LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk CME LWO1 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network No need to set CME LW01 address This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME LW01 that is used to communicate with Delta VFD E firmware version of VFD E should conform with CME LW01 according to the table below via LonWorks Network B 10 2 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 57 3 2 26 59 7 2 35 3 5 0 14 34 8 1 37 UNIT mm inch S B 10 2 3 Specifications Power supply 16 30VDC 750mW Communication Modbus in ASCII format protocol 9600 7 N 2 LonTalk free topology with FTT 10A 78 Kbps LonTalk terminal 4 pin terminals wire gauge 28 12 AWG wire strip length 7 8mm RS 485 port 8 pins with RJ 45 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 27 Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 4 Wiring Service LED Service Pin PowerLED SPLED sp c hama Boy 1 Reserved 5 SG 2 EV 6 Reserved 3 GND 7 Reserved 4 SG 8 Reserved 1 2 3 4 3 LonTalk LonTalk a Terminal definition for LonTalk system Terminal Symbol Function 1 These are twisted pai
171. e 2 Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty 3 Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws Other directions are not allowed 4 The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 9 Chapter 1 Introduction 5 The heat sink temperature may rise to 90 C when running The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature 6 When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space e g cabinet the surrounding temperature must be within 10 40 C with good ventilation DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation T Prevent fiber particles scraps of paper saw dust metal particles etc from adhering to the heatsink 8 When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in between When installing one AC motor drive below another one use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation 120mm BA 1 Y 4 1 1 1A 1 M n Ta 120mm 150mm FrameA Frame B andC FrameA Frame B and C 1 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduc
172. e device connects to a device or a block in series AND command AND command 414 0 12 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 3 OR ORI command single device connects to a device or a block Mes ORcommand ORcommand OR command The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 4 ANB command a block connects to a device a block in series ANB command 5 ORB command a block connects to a device or a block in parallel If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right 6 MPS MRD MPP commands Divergent memory of multi output It can produce many various outputs 7 The command MPS is the start of divergent point The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line Basically each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol T 8 MRD command is used to read memory of diver
173. e of the slave nodes The state diagram of a node are shown as follows Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 7 Initializing Reset Application PEE CR 9 10 11 ba m Reset Communication Dor 14 Pre Operation ABCD UD Stopped AB 6 8 12 Operation ABCD 1 After power is applied it is auto in initialization state A 2 Enter pre operational state automatically B Node Guard 3 6 Start remote node C SDO 4 7 Enter pre operational state D Emergency 5 8 Stop remote node E PDO 9 10 11 Reset node F Boot up 12 13 14 Reset communication 15 Enter reset application state automatically 16 Enter reset communication state automatically Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix E CANopen Function E 6 Initializing Pre Operational Operational Stopped PDO SDO SYNC Time Stamp EMERG Boot up O Ol O JO O OJO O NMT NMT Protocol is shown as follows NMT Master Start Remote Node NMT Slave s Request byte0 byte 1 Indication s t CS Node ID Indication Fes COB ID 0 gt Indication gt Indication Cs Value De
174. e time saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising edge into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation 1 LDP 0 Start rising edge detection I t l OD AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDF Falling edge detection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y zm Explanations Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling edge into the accumulative register Program Example Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 41 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO 1 LDF 0 Start falling edge detection im AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDP Rising edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y v Explanations ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X4 LD Load A contact of X0 Cn 5 ANDP X1 X1 rising edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Functi
175. eaker R L1 S L2 T L3 Recommended Circuit l Mc when power supply is turned OFF by a OEF a fault output an MC a FWD Stop Factory setting NPN Mode REV Stop NPN Factory Multi step 1 t sw setting Multi step 2 PNP i Please refer to Figure 7 4 Multi step 3 forwiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP b Oa mode Digital Signal Common S td Factory setting 3 ACI Mode 2 4 p 5KQ IL 1 ACI PAE ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common G l 10V Power supply 10V 20mA AVI Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K 0 ACI 4 20mA 0 10V ACM 3E U T1 V T2 W T3 C E RA RB AFM ACM Motor IM ode l Multi function contact output Refer to chapter2 4 for details Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting Drive is in operation 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function __ Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA r Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 Serial interface Reserved EV GND SG SG Reserved Reserved Reserved ONDAN gt Main circuit power terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable For VFD E T series the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals B1 and B2 directly But
176. ealer PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made 2 Acharge may still remain in the DC link capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Never reassemble internal components or wiring The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input output terminals Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply Ground the VFD E using the ground terminal The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram 6 VFD E series is used only to control variable speed of 3 phase induction motors NOT for 1 phase motors or other purpose 7 VFD E series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation Amm DO NOT use Hi pot test for internal components The semi conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high voltage 2 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards These components are especially sensitive to static electricity To prevent damage to these components do not touch these
177. ed no EF Terminal Count display di aii 1 Terminal count value attained EF active Fan Control 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 4 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto customer Setting 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained Read only Bit0 1 RLY used by PLC Bit1 1 MO1 used by PLC The Digital Output Bit2 1 MO2 RA2 used by PLC asia i Bit3 1 MO3 RA3 used by PLC NOT for VFD E C pee Nee models Bit4 1 MO4 RA4 used by PLC Bit5 1 MO5 RAS5 used by PLC Bit6 1 MO6 RAG used by PLC Bit7 1 MO7 RA7 used by PLC Read only The Analog Output Used by PLC Bit0 1 AFM used by PLC NOT for VFD E C Bitt 1 AO1 used by PLC models Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC 03 11 Brake Release 0 00 to 20 00Hz Brake Engage Frequency 0 00 to 20 00Hz Read only RLY Status Bit1 MO1 Status Display the Status of Bit2 MO2 RA2 Status Multi function Bit3 MO3 RA3 Status Output Terminals MO4 RA4 Status Bits MO5 RAS5 Status Bit6 MO6 RA6 Status Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status Desired Frequency 03 14 2 Attained 0 00 to 600 0Hz Group 4 Input Function Parameters Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Keypad 6 ao Pote
178. eed Frequency M 9th Step Speed Frequency M 10th Step Speed Frequency X 11th Step Speed Frequency 12th Step Speed Frequency M 13th Step Speed Frequency A 14th Step Speed Frequency 15th Step Speed Frequency Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea The Multi function Input Terminals refer to Pr 04 05 to 04 08 are used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi step speeds The speeds frequencies are determined by Pr 05 00 to 05 14 as shown in the following 4 88 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency JOG Freq 01 15 Run Stop 1 2 3 a i 10 11 12 13 14 15 PU external terminals 1 a Mi3 fo MIS 1 or m En a E 8 2nd speed MI3 to MI6 2 3rd speed MI3 to MI6 3 OFF 4th speed ROS Yd uu MI3 to MI6 4 OFF _ 1 __ Multi function MI3 MI9 04 05 04 0 terminals Multi speed via External Terminals MI6 4 MI5 3 MI4 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON nd speed OFF OFF ON OFF ri speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed O
179. election external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection Co lt gt 1 04 24 _ l Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 155 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 04 25 Reserved Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 30 Constant Group 9 Communication Parameters F Factory 09 12 Reserved CANopen disable Communication 1 Address 1 1to 127 CANbus Baud Rate _ 09 15 Gain of CANbus 00 2 00 DES Frequency bit 0 CANopen Guarding Time out bit 1 CANopen Heartbeat Time out bit 2 CANopen SYNC Time out bit 3 CANopen SDO Time out Read bit 4 CANopen SDO buffer overflow only bit 5 CANbus Off bit 6 Error protocol of CANopen bit 7 CANopen boot up fault 09 16 CANbus Warning Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card 4 156 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation TY Customer Setting No function Multi functio
180. election 3 PID Set Point PID enable 4 Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback 0 Al1 Analog Signal ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA i Mode 1 AVI3 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V 1202 Min AVIS Input 0 0 to 10 0V Voltage Min AVI3 Scale Max AVI3 Input 12 05 Max Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 E Percentage 12 06 Min ACI2 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA e Current 1207 Min ACI2 Scale 4 9 to 100 0 DEM Percentage 12 08 ACI2 Input 9 9 to 20 0mA 20 urrent 1209 Max ACI2 Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 E Percentage Disabled Source of the 1st frequency 12 10 Al2 Function Source of the 2nd frequency Selection PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback ee Al2 Analog Signal ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode AVIA analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 29 Chapter 4 Parameters Setting 12 12 Min Input 0 0 to 10 0V poo Voltage Min AVI4 Scale 1244 Max Input 9 9 to 40 gy foo Voltage 1245 Max AVI4 Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 NE Percentage 12 16 Min ACIS Input 0 0 to 20 0mA pao Current Min ACI3 Scale 12 18 eu ACIS Input 9 9 to 20 0mA 20 12 19 Max Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 mE Percentage 0 AVO1 AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO1 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA AO1 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Si
181. er Limit Skip Frequency 1 08 10 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 08 11 Skip Frequency 2 4 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit 0812 Skip Frequency 2 9 99 to 600 0 Hz 00 Lower Limit 08 13 Skip Frequency 3 9 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit Skip Frequency 3 9 99 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Lower Limit Auto Restart After to 10 0 disable 0 Fault 08 16 Auto Reset Time at 0 1 to 6000 sec Restart after Fault 0 Disable Auto Energy Saving 4 Enable 4 22 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 0 AVR function enable 1 AVR function disable 08 18 AVR Function 2 AVR function disable for decel 3 AVR function disable for stop ond Software Brake 115V 230V series 370 0to 430 0V Level 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V Compensation 08 20 Coefficient for Motor Instability 08 21 OOB Sampling Time 9 1 to 120 0 sec 1 0 Number of OOB 00 to 32 08 23 OOB Average Read only m Sampling Angle 0 Disable 08 24 DEB Function 1 Enable 08 25 DEB Return Time Oto 250 sec Group 9 Communication Parameters Factory Expianation Settings Setting Communication A 09 00 Address 254 0 Baud rate 4800bps Baud rate 9600bps 09 01 Transmission Speed 1 Baud rate 19200bps Baud rate 38400bps Warn and keep operating ieei Warn and ramp to stop 09 02 ee Fault d Warn and coast to stop No warning and keep operating Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11
182. er to BUE series user manual for details BRI Brake resistor unit optional Pleasereferto Appendix B for details r BUE p or i a Connect the terminals P N of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals B1 The length of wiring should be less than 5m with cable a When not used please leave the terminals B1 open WIE Short circuiting B2 or to B1 can damage the AC motor drive Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 15 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals FrameA ADI O RUN AUT Frame C Frame Power Terminals Torque Wire Wire type R L1 S L2 T L3 A bi edidi Copper only 75 C umi vit wm 121100 321 R L1 S L2 T L3 18kgf cm 8 18 AWG U T1 V T2 W T3 7 o B 15 6in Ibf 8 4 0 8mm Copper only 75 C B1 B2 R L1 S L2 T L3 30kgf cm 8 16 AWG U T1 V T2 W T3 o C 26in Ibf 8 4 1 3mm Copper only 75 C B1 B2 2 16 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T
183. esseessessceusesseeuecsuees 2 17 Chapter Keypad and Start 3 1 3 1 Keypad sis E 3 1 3 2 Operation Method eei metere ein Eee n eee 3 2 3 3 rial cn 3 3 Chapter 4 4 1 4 1 Summary of Parameter 4 2 4 2 Parameter Settings for 4 32 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings 4 37 4 4 Different Parameters for VFD E C 4 152 Chapter 5 5 1 5 1 Over Current OC ienr a 5 1 5 2 Ground Fault anniv wean rper ee t ed de es 5 2 5 3 Over Voltage OV 5 niece iere tirer ede ene Pedes 5 2 5 4 Low Voltage Ev core e 5 3 5 5 Over Heat OH sinu eb dte 5 4 5 6 Overload 2 t b pou etie ete MEO Une tested 5 4 5 7 Keypad Display is 5 5 5 8 Phase Loss PHL tede eer petet anna 5 5 5 9 Motor Cannot iieri inter n DER uite etd e RR Hed 5 6 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed 5 7 5 1
184. et between set point and feedback Ea When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr 10 12 for a time exceeding the setting of Pr 10 13 the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 is set to 16 Sleep Wake Up Detection Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 6550 sec Factory Setting 0 0 10 15 Sleep Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Wakeup Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea When the actual output frequency lt Pr 10 15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode E When the actual frequency command Pr 10 16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will restart Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 135 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea co When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode frequency command is still calculated by PID When frequency reaches wake up frequency AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr 01 05 minimum frequency following the V f curve The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency Frequency 4 136 A frequency calculated by PID 10 16 EE The limit of decel time output frequency Fmin lower bound of frequency Fsleep O O Fmin Fsleep 1 lower bound of frequency When output frequency lt slee
185. et to be ON as shown in the following diagram the source of first master frequency command Pr 02 00 will force setting to 2 This setting Pr 02 00 can t be changed till the 3 switch is set to be OFF TE When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 for details The first second frequency operation command is enabled disabled by Multi Function Input Terminals Please refer to Pr 04 05 04 08 0201 X Source of First Operation Command Settings Factory Setting 1 Digital keypad Digital keypad is optional External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1 digital keypad is optional When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 Pr 04 04 for details Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 51 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 First Master Frequency Command Only 1 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency 2 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency 02 02 Stop Method Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 STOP ramp t
186. evel 1 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M Group 1 Basic Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer 01 11 Accel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 01 12 Decel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec EE Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto TY Customer Setting 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of First 1 0 to 10V from AVI Master Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication Source of First 0 Digital keypad Operation Command 1 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 153 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved So rceof Second 1 0 to 10V from AVI 02 09 Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potent
187. finition 1 Start 2 Stop 128 Enter Pre Operational 129 Reset Node 130 Reset Communication E 1 4 2 SDO Service Data Object SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client Server model One SDO has two COB ID request SDO and response SDO to upload or download data between two nodes No data limit for SDOs to transfer data But it needs to transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment The Object Dictionary OD is a group of objects in CANopen node Every node has an OD in the system and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior The access path of OD is the index and sub index each object has a unique index in OD and has sub index if necessary The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Data 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 1615 14 13 12110 1 1 1 Data Data Data Data command L H Sub LL LH HL HH Initiate Domain Client O 0 1 N EIS Download Server 0 1 1 Initiate Domain Client 0 1 0 Upload Server 0 1 0 N EIS Abort Domain Client 1 00 Transfer Server 1 0 0 iH N
188. for standard motors Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully When the AC Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive motor drive operates more than one motor please pay attention to starting and changing the motor Power Transmission Mechanism Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors gearboxes belts and chains etc over longer periods at low speeds At high speeds of 50 60Hz and above lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur Motor torque The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power are different Below you ll find the torque speed characteristics of a standard motor 4 pole 15kW AC motor drive Motor 180 180 155 60 seconds 155 60 seconds 140 continuous continuous E S 100f jr 80 5 55H 0320 60 120 0320 60 120 ibo us Ade NE ase freq 2 ase 2 V F for 220V 60Hz V F for 220V 60Hz 180 140 t tS 60 seconds 150 60 seconds 130 continuous continuous 100 5 o 850 2 b 100 5 68 2 80 2 45 5 0320 50 120 0320 50 120 bred de Uie ase freq
189. fter fault occurred RUN Key ENTER Start AC drive operation Used to enter modify programming parameters Display Message Descriptions Displays the AC drive Master Frequency SG Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 REVe BER User defined unit where U F x Pr 00 05 CENE Displays the output current at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 CEDERE Displays the AC motor drive forward run status aaa Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status RUN je STOP The counter value C a Displays the selected parameter B 18 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Display Message FWDe REV 6 jestoP le estor FWDe RUNS je stop FWDe REV e e estope REV e le Descriptions Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter External Fault Display End for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing Ex key After a parameter value has been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the a and ma keys Display Err if the input is invalid Pria When the setting exceeds 99 99 for those numbers with 2 decimals i e unit is 0 01 it will only display 1 decimal due to 4 digital display Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 19 Appendix B Accessories B 8 2 How to Oper
190. generation using C language The function takes two arguments Unsigned char data a pointer to the message buffer Unsigned char length the quantity of bytes in the message buffer The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Unsigned int crc_chk unsigned char data unsigned char length int j unsigned int reg_crc OxFFFF while length reg crc data for j 0 j lt 8 j if reg crc amp 0x01 LSB b0 1 reg crc reg crc 1 OxA001 Jelse reg crc reg crc gt gt 1 return reg crc 3 5 Address list The contents of available addresses are shown as below Content Address Function GG means parameter group nn means parameter number for example the address of Pr 04 01 is 0401H Refer to AC drive GGnnH chapter 5 for the function of each parameter When reading Parameters parameter by command code 03H only one parameter can be read at one time Command OOB No function Write only 01B Stop Bit 0 1 10B Run 11B Jog Run Bit 2 3 Reserved 00B No function 2000H 01B FWD Bit 4 5 10B REV 11B Change direction N 00B Comm forced 1st accel decel Bit 6 7 01B Comm forced 2nd accel decel Bit 8 15 Reserved Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 123 Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function 2001H Fre
191. gent point Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line it needs to read the status of original contact to keep Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 13 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function on analyzing other ladder diagram You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol 9 MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack Because it is the last item of the horizontal line it means the status of this horizontal line is ending MPS C 2 You can recognize this command by the symbol MPS C 3 x L Basically that is all right to use the above i C 2 MRD method to analyze but sometimes compiler will a amp omit the same outputs as shown at the right MER D 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program a Start Stop and Latching In the same occasions it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch Therefore if you want to keep the action you should design latching circuit There are several latching circuits in the following Example 1 the latching circuit for priority of stop When start normally open contact X1 On stop Y1 X2 normally contact X2 Off and Y1 On are set at STOP the same time if X2 On the coil Y1 will stop 5 acting Therefore it calls priority of stop TARE Example 2 the latching circuit for priorit
192. gister the pointer of operation result doesn t move Mnemonic Function MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register the stack pointer will decrease 1 Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation MPS OUT MPP MRD AND OUT MPP OUT END Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 1 2 MO Y2 Load contact A of X0 Save in stack Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil Read from the stack without moving pointer Connect to contact A of X2 in series Drive MO coil Read from the stack Drive Y2 coil End program D 35 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function INV Inverting Operation Operand None Explanations Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation Hik LD Load A contact of X0 T INV Inverting the operation result OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OUT Output coil X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v v n Explanations Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device Motion of coil contact OUT command Operation Cont
193. gnal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 42 22 AO1 Analog Output 4 to 200 Gain 0 AVO2 2 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA 2 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 1225 AO2 Analog Output to 200 DE Gain 4 30 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Disabled 1 Single phase 13 00 PG Input 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation 13 01 PG Pulse Range 102000 to 20000 nes Pole Number 13 03 ae Gain 0 0 to 10 0 13 04 Integral Gain 1 0 00 to 100005 00 to 100 00 sec Speed Control Output Frequency 0 00 to 100 00Hz 10 00 Limit Speed Feedback W13 06 Display Filter 9 Fais Detection Time for 0 0 disabled Feedback Signal 1 Fault 0 1 to 10 0 sec 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the Feedback Signal 1 Warn and COAST to stop 1 Fault 2 Warn and keep operation 1309 Speed Feedback ois 999 ilter Source of the High 9 PG card Read speed Counter 1 PLC NOT for VFD E C models Only Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 31 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 2 Parameter Settings for Applications Speed Search
194. gs and each timer has its regular period User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period Once the coil is OFF the contact won t act contact a is open and contact b is close and the timer will be set to zero Equipment indication TO T1 T15 The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system The different number range corresponds with the different timing period Counter Counter is used to count It needs to set counter before using counter i e the pulse of counter There are coil contacts and storage unit of counter in counter When coil is from OFF to ON that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1 There are 16 bit 32 bit and high speed counter for user to use Equipment indication CO C1 C7 The symbol of equipment is and the number uses decimal Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order timer value and counter value The data register is used to store data or parameters It stores Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 9 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 16 bit binary number i e a word in each register It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words c Equipment indication DO D1 D29 The symbol of equipment is D and the number uses decimal The structure and explanation of ladder diagram La
195. h speed counter When C235 goes from H 1004F to H 10050 or from H 10051 to H 10050 M2 will be always be ON M1028 it is used to enable ON disable OFF the high speed counter function M1029 it is used to clear the high speed counter M1018 it is used to start high speed counter function when M1028 is ON D1025 the low word of high speed counter C235 D1026 the high word of high speed counter C235 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 59 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M100 _ mov KO D1044 M101 M102 MO M1018 4 DHSCS H10050 C235 M1 M1018 1 DHSCS H3 C235 M3 M2 M3 M10 E cai M1000 API Mnemonic Operands Function 139 RPR P S1 82 Read the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnX KnM T C D RPR RPRP 5 steps 1 S2 0 60 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Operands S1 Data address for reading S2 Register that saves the read data API Mnemonic Operands Function 140 WPR 1 S2 Write the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OR x Y M K H KnY KnM T D WPR WPRP 5 steps 1 S2 Operands S1 Data addre
196. h 4 20mA 0 10V 6 Reserved When switching to AVI L ACM 8 4 7 Reserved It indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common T E 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 Main circuit power terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Figure 3 for models of VFD E Series Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 e S L2 e Recommended Circuit i MC when powersupply vis turned OFF bya OFF i fault output due OMG e FWD Stop Factory setting NPNIMOdS REV Stop NPN Factory Multi step 1 1 fe setting Multi step 2 PNP i Please refer to Figure 7 e Multi step 3 for wiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP t mode Digital Signal Common t Factory setting ACIMode AVI 5kQ NEZ 1 ACI ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 Main circuit power terminals Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Analog Signal Common T a brake resistor OMI optional BR B1 B2 O R L1 U T1 S L2 V T2 A W T3 a RB RA Multi function contact output RC Refer to chapter2 4 for details i RB Factory setting is L malfunction indication 24V RC MI1 a MO1 Factory setting MI2 yoo Drive
197. h or relay Correct connection o Check if the parameter setting and wiring of analog signal and multi step speed Change defective potentiometer and relay are correct Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA Connect correctly Motor is locked due to large load please reduce load For example if there is a brake check if itis released Im Increase the setting of torque compensation 5 6 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed For VFD E C models no PLC function is supported Please follow the dashed line to skip the PLC parts Motor can run but cannot change speed Yes Check if the setting of the max frequency is too low m Modify the setting No v If the executi Check to see if frequency is Yes time is too out of range upper lower gt Modify the setting boundaries bis Press UP DOWN key Yes If finishe L Yes executing PLC to see if speed has Aaea program any change If there is any change Yes i fthe signal that sets Check if the PLC o 9 9 frequency 0 10V program is correc 4 20mA No Check if the wiring between No MI1 MI6 to DCM is correct No Y No Check if the wiring of
198. he output current of the AC drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 then 2 5 times the rated current corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output gt tae Any type of voltmeter can be used If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V Pr 03 04 should be set using the following formula Pr 03 04 meter full scale voltage 10 x 100 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 63 Chapter 4 Parameters For Example When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts adjust Pr 03 04 to 50 If Pr 03 03 is set to 0 then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency ETE Terminal Count Value Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter To increase the internal counter one of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 should be set to 12 Upon completion of counting the specified output terminal will be activated Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 10 When the display shows 555 the drive has counted 555 times If display shows c555e it means that real counter value is between 5 550 and 5 559 ETE Preliminary Count Value Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 When the counter value reaches this value the corresponding multi function output terminal will be activated provided one of Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 11 Preliminary Count Value Setting This multi function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal Count Value Atta
199. he user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records Pr 06 08 Pr 06 12 50Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 01 are set to 50Hz and Pr 01 02 will be set by Pr 00 12 60Hz Pr 01 00 and 01 01 are set to 60Hz and Pr 01 02 is set to 115V 230V or 460V When Pr 00 02 1 all parameters are read only To write all parameters set Pr 00 02 0 00 03 X Start up Display Selection Settings 0 1 2 Factory Setting 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx Display the actual output frequency Hxxx Display the output current in A supplied to the motor Axxx Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx FWD REV command PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models This parameter determines the start up display page after power is applied to the drive For setting 5 PLCO disable PLC1 run PLC PLC2 read write PLC programs into AC motor drive ET X Content of Multi function Display Settings 0 Factory Setting 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx H Display the counter value which counts the number of pulses on TRG terminal Display PLC D1043 value C r EE NOT for VFD E C models 8 Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC motor drive Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 to the motor Le E Display PID analog feedback signal value in 4 38 Revis
200. heat Protection Unit 1 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable 07 14 Motor Overheat Protection Level Unit 0 1 4 98 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 2 4 En s D B When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower To prevent overheating it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive s corresponding control terminals When the source of first second frequency command is set to AVI 02 00 1 02 09 1 it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection i e Pr 07 12 cannot be set to 1 Qui t If temperature exceeds the setting level motor will be coast to stop and amp amp is displayed When the temperature decreases below the level of Pr 07 15 Pr 07 16 and a t L stops blinking you can press RESET key to clear the fault Pr 07 14 overheat protection level must exceed Pr 07 15 overheat warning level The PTC uses the AVI input and is connected via resistor divider as shown below 1 The voltage between 10V to ACM lies within 10 4V 11 2V 2 The impedance for AVI is around 47kQ 3 Recommended value for resistor divider R1 is 1 20kQ 4 Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC VFD E 10V
201. heck 1 F LRC Check 0 6 END 1 CR END 0 LF 01H 03H 04H 01H 00H 01H 0AH the 2 s complement negation of OAH is F6H RTU mode Address 01H Function 03H Starting data address 21H 02H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check is calculated by the following steps Step 1 Load a 16 bit register called CRC register with FFFFH Step 2 Exclusive OR the first 8 bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16 bit CRC register putting the result in the CRC register Step 3 Examine the LSB of CRC register Step 4 If the LSB of CRC register is 0 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling then repeat step 3 If the LSB of CRC register is 1 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H then repeat step 3 Step 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed When this is done a complete 8 bit byte will have been processed Step 6 Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8 bit byte of the command message Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value When transmitting the CRC value in the message the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped i e the lower order byte will be transmitted first The following is an example of CRC
202. her layer protocol It provides standardized communication objects including real time data Process Data Objects PDO configuration data Service Data Objects SDO and special functions Time Stamp Sync message and Emergency message And it also has network management data including Boot up message NMT message and Error Control message Refer to CiA website http www can cia org for details Delta CANopen supports functions Support CAN2 0A Protocol Support CANopen 05301 4 02 Support DSP 402 2 0 L Delta CANopen supports services PDO Process Data Objects PDO1 PDO2 SDO Service Data Object Initiate SDO Download Initiate SDO Upload Abort SDO SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node SOP Special Object Protocol Support default COB ID in Predefined Master Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4 02 Support SYNC service Support Emergency service Network Management Support NMT module control Support NMT Error control Support Boot up Delta CANopen doesn t support service Time Stamp service Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 E 1 Appendix E CANopen Function E 1 Overview E 1 1 CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN based higher layer protocol and was designed for motion oriented machine control networks such as handling systems Version 4 of CANopen CiA DS301 is standardized as EN50325 4
203. his parameter will be invalid for Frame A models VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A and VFD022E23A 43A without brake chopper for which BUE brake unit must be used EZE Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 5 0 Factory Setting 0 0 Ea The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will make motor instable By using this parameter it will improve this situation greatly E The drift current zone of the high power motors is usually in the low frequency area It is recommended to set to more than 2 0 Sampling Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 08 22 Number of OOB Sampling Times Unit 1 Settings 0 00 to 32 Factory Setting 20 08 23 OOB Average Sampling Angle Settings Read only Factory Setting Ea The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with PLC for washing machine When multi function input terminal is enabled MI 26 it will get A0 value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t value Pr 08 23 When value is large it means unbalanced load At this moment it needs Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 109 Chapter 4 Parameters to lower the freqeuency command by PLC or the host controller On the other hand it can be high speed operation ETE D
204. ication of the AC motor drives M1006 Output frequency is 0 M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives FWD 0 REV 1 M1008 Reserved M1009 Reserved M1010 Reserved M1011 10ms clock pulse 5ms On 5ms Off M1012 100ms clock pulse 50ms On 50ms Off M1013 1s clock pulse 0 55 On 0 55 Off M1014 1min clock pulse 30s On 30s Off M1015 Frequency attained M1016 Parameter read write error M1017 Succeed to write parameter M1018 Enable high speed counter function When M1028 On M1019 Reserved M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag M1022 Carry flag M1023 Divisor is 0 DID D D D D D D D D D D M1024 Reserved M1025 RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 R W D 25 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Function Gena M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON R W M1027 Reserved M1028 Enable ON disable OFF high speed counter function R W M1029 Clear the value of high speed counter R W M1030 Decide to count up OFF count down ON R W M1031 Reserved D 4 9 Special Registers Special D Function Read R Write W D1000 Reserved 01001 firmware version R D1002 Program capacity D1003 Checksum R
205. ife Example for 460V models Assume the carrier frequency to be 15kHz the ambient temperature is 50 degrees C with a single AC motor drive mounting method A If the output current exceeds 80 rated current the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following chart If output current is 10096 rated current the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to 12kHz Mounting method Method A FrameA Frame amp Method B Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 100 90 Chapter 4 Parameters 25 C with mounting method A 15 C with mounting method 8096 35 C with mounting method A 25 C with mounting method B 50 C with mounting method A 7096 60 40 C with mounting method B Rated Current 50 40 Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 4kHz 8kHz For 115V 230V Series 1OkHz _ i4kHz 5kHz Frequency 12kHz 25 C with mounting method A 15 C with mounting method B 35 with mounting method A 25 C with mounting method B 50 C with mounting method A Rated Current 96 ES 8 40 C with mounting method 2kHz 6kHz 4kHz 8kHz For 460V Series Carrier 10kHz 14kHz15kHz Frequency 12kHz 02 04 Motor Direction Control Settings 0 Forward Reverse operation enabled 1 Reverse operation disabled 2 Forw
206. ime Setting 20 to 25096 of rated current Operation frequency 0 1 600 0Hz output 0 100 rated current Start time 0 60 seconds stop time 0 60 seconds Approx 2096 up to 12596 possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit 1 15hp 0 75 11kW models have brake chopper built in 4 point adjustable V f pattern Setting by CA Y Potentiometer 5kQ 0 5W 0 to 10VDC 4 to 20mA RS 485 interface Multi function Inputs 3 to 9 15 steps Jog up down Set by RUN and STOP 2 wires 3 wires MI1 MI2 MI3 JOG operation RS 485 serial interface MODBUS programmable logic controller Multi step selection 0 to 15 Jog accel decel inhibit 2 accel decel switches counter external Base Block ACI AVI selections driver reset UP DOWN key settings NPN PNP input selection Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications AC drive operating frequency attained zero speed Base Block fault Multi function Output Indication indication overheat alarm emergency stop and status selections of input terminals Analog Output Signal Output frequency current Contact will be On when drive malfunctions 1 Form C change over contact and 1 open collector output for standard type Built in PLC NOT for CANopen models AVR accel decel S Curve over voltage over current stall prevention 5 fault records reverse inhibition momentary power loss restart DC brake auto t
207. imum Frequency and Mid Point frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequency Pr 01 01 This setting must be greater than Pr 01 05 4 42 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Ea This parameter sets the Mid Point Voltage of any V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point Frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage Pr 01 06 and equal to or less than Maximum Output Voltage Pr 01 02 This setting should be greater than 01 06 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Ea This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid Point Frequency Pr 01 03 The settings of 01 03 01 04 and 01 06 are invalid Vector Control mode Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Ea This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive This parameter must be equa
208. ined The timing diagram c0088 c008 0582 0003 008 0005 c000 1 c0008 2msecle i 2msec i The width of trioga sioa Preliminary Count Value 4 should not be less than 03 00 Pr 03 01 11 y 03 05 5 03 06 3 2ms lt 250 Hz Terminal Count Value Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 10 03 07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained Factory Setting 0 Display Pr 00 04 1 TRG Counter Trigger Settings 0 Terminal count value attained EF display 1 Terminal count value attained EF active If this parameter is set to 1 the desired value of counter is attained the AC drive will treat it as a fault The drive will stop and show the EF message on the display 4 64 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Fan Control Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained Ea This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan Digital Output Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory setting BitO 1 RLY used by PLC Bit1 1 MO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 MO2 RA2 used by PLC Bit3 1 MO3 RA3 used by PLC Bit4 1 MO4 RA4 used by PLC 5 1 MO5 RA5 used by PLC Bit6 1 MO
209. ing 0 4 FLA X Torque Compensation Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 A Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mO Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 101 Chapter 4 Parameters Motor Pole Number Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 0732 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Motor No load Current Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA 07 34 Torque Compensation Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mO Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 07 38 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 4 102 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 8 Special Para
210. ins the T Present value of timer TO T15 16 points contact of timer will be On When timer attains the Present value of counter CO C7 8 bit counter 8 points contact of timer will be Es On g For latched DO D9 10 points 9 Total is 2 Data For general D10 D29 20 points It can be memory area register x for storing data 1o joints 2 For special D1000 D1044 45 points Decimal K 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation e 5 Hexadecima H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation o Communication port for read write RS485 slave program Analog input output Built in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Function extension module optional Digital input output card A D D A card D 4 2 Devices Functions D 20 The Function of Input output Contacts The function of input contact X input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program The On Off of input contact X can be changed with the On Off of input equipment but can t be changed by using peripheral equipment WPLSoft The Function of Output Contact Y The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On Off signal There are two kinds of output contact one is relay and the other is transistor It is unlimited usage times for A or
211. iometer 5 CANopen communication Read Only BitO 1 by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 Display the Master PEN 02 16 Freq Command Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 Source Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command NOT for VFD E C models Read Only BitO 1 by Digital Keypad Display the Bit1 1 by RS485 communication 02 17 Operation Command Source Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Bit3 1 by Multi input function Bit5 1 by CANopen communication Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 03 09 Reserved 03 10 Reserved Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Multi function Input 0 No function 1 Terminal MI3 1 Multi Step speed command 1 4 154 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Multi function Input 3 Multi Step speed command 3 Terminal MI4 4 Multi Step speed command 4 5 External reset Multi function Input 6 Accel Decel inhibit Terminal MI5 7 Accel Decel time selection command 8 Jog Operation Multi function Input 9 External base block Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Counter reset E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command s
212. ion June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters MURIT v Content of Multi function Display 6 Display the power factor angle in of terminals U T1 ERES V T2 W T3 to the motor Ue ET AA 7 Display the output power in kW of terminals V and W to the motor 8 Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates Pip iri to current Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal V 9 LLLI 10 Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal mA or display the signal of AVI2 analog input terminal V L 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C an 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level I 4 LLLI 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i n UI 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M cu Ea When Pr00 03 is set to 03 the display is according to the setting of Pr00 04 00 05 User Defined Coefficient Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 tod 160 0 Factory Setting 1 0 Ea The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user defined unit The display value is calculated as follows U User defined unit Actual output frequency K Pr 00 05 Example A conveyor belt runs at 13 6m s at motor speed 60Hz K 13 6 60 0 22 0 226667 rounded to 1 decimal therefore Pr 00 05 0 2 With Frequency command 35Hz display shows U and 35 0 2 7 0m s To increase accuracy use K 2 2 or K 22 7 and disregard decimal poin
213. ionary Example Master transmits PDO data to Slave PDO1 CAN H gt gt CAN L gt gt Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 0x88 Index Sub efinition Value R W Size C 0x60400010 PDO1 Map X 47 x us 0x60400010 0x6040 O 0 Control word 0x2211 R W 2 Bytes Slave returns message to Master PDO1 CAN H CAN L 4 4 Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 OxF3 0x00 5 ndex Sub Definition Value R W Size C N PDO1 Map M 0x60410010 0 6041 0 Status Word sS OXES RW 8 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function E 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency Object Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt The data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following Byte 0 1 2 3 5 7 Content Emergency Error Error register Code Manufacturer specific Error Field Object 1001H Definition of Emergency Object
214. is in operation T A 48V50mA Max MIA Multi function Photocoulper Output 5 MI6 Analog Multi function AFM Output Terminal p DCM factory setting Analog SECO freq current meter EC ACM 0 10VDC 2mA EA Analog Signal common Factory setting output 10V frequency Power supply RS 485 serial interface 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models AVI 1 Reserved Master Frequency 2 EV Oto 10V 47K 2 3 GND ACI 4 SG 4 20mA 0 10V 5 56 6 Reserved ACM 8 1 7 Reserved 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please refer to figure 8 Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 4 for models of VFD E Series VFD022E23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A VFD022E23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E43C Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 S L2 T L3 Recommended Circuit when power supply is turned OFF bya fault output Factory setting NPN Mode ird Factory 5 setting PNP Please refer to Figure7 for wiring of NPN mode and mode Factory setting ACI Mode AVI 5 2 ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 OFF e FWD Stop e REV Stop e Multi step 1 i Multi step 2 4 Multi step 3 4 Multi step 4 Digital Signal Common t 5KQ Analog Signal Common 0 Main circuit power terminals brake
215. it11 Internal limit active Bit12 13 Bit14 15 0x6042 vl target velocity 0 516 rpm Yes 0x6043 vi velocity 0 RO S16 Yes demand ramp function If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x604F 0 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and time can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6050 0 slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes must be 100ms can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6051 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW 032 1ms Yes junit must be 100ms and can t be set to 0 E 12 Revision June 2008 O4EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Factory Index Sub Definition Setting RW Size Unit Map NOTE 0 disable drive function 1 slow down on slow down ramp 2 slow down on quick stop Quick stop option ramp 2th decel time Ox605A 0 ode 2 RW S16 1ms Yes 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP o Mode of 2 RO U8 Yes Speed mode operation oxe061 o Mode of 2 RO Yes operation display E 2 How to Control by CANopen To control the AC motor drive by CANopen please set parameters by the following steps Step 1 Operation source setting set Pr 02 01 to 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled Step 2 Frequency source setting set Pr
216. ital Keypad Display the Bit121 by RS485 communication 02 17 Operation Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Command Source piu by Multi input function Bit4 1 by PLC Operation Command NOT for VFD E C models Group 3 Output Function Parameters z Factory No function Multi function AC drive operational 03 00 Output Relay RAT RB1 RC1 Master frequency attained Zero speed Over torque detection Multi function Base Block B B indication 03 01 Output Terminal MO1 Low voltage indication Operation mode indication Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 9 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 8 Fault indication 9 Desired frequency 1 attained 10 Terminal count value attained 11 Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current Stall supervision Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Forward command Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Brake control Desired frequency attained Drive ready 3 Desired frequency 2 attained Desired Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz 1 Attained Analog Output 0 Analog frequency meter Signal Selection AFM 1 Analog current meter 403 04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 1t020 03 05 Terminal Count _ to 9999 Value Preliminary Count 0 to 9999 Value EF Active When 0 Terminal count value attain
217. ive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive When an error occurs on the drive a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive output is turned off Then the motor will coast to stop For an emergency stop an external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor Parameter Settings Note 1 The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz less for some models with the digital keypad Setting errors may create a dangerous situation For safety the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time at low frequencies may cause overheating of the motor In that case forced external motor cooling is recommended Motor accel decel time is determined by motor rated torque load torque and load inertia If the stall prevention function is activated the accel decel time is automatically extended to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time with high load inertia that can t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive required time either use an external brake resistor and or brake unit depending on the model to shorten deceleration time only or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive C 3
218. l to or less than Mid Point Voltage Pr 01 04 E The settings of Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 have to meet the condition of Pr 01 02 gt Pr 01 04 gt Pr 01 06 and Pr 01 01 gt Pr 01 03 gt Pr 01 05 Ea In vector control mode Pr 00 10 is set to 1 Pr 01 03 Pr 01 04 and Pr 01 06 are disabled 0107 Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 120 0 Factory Setting 110 0 Ea This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit Pr 01 08 The Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 is regarded as 10096 Ea Output Frequency Upper Limit value 7 Pr 01 00 Pr 01 07 100 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 43 Chapter 4 Parameters 01 08 01 07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Output Frequency Voltage Lower Limit 01 02 premere Maximum i Output Voltage f 01 04 i Mid point Volt i Soe Thelimitof Output Frequency 01 06 4 01405 01 03 01 01 01 00 utput ini i i Maximum Voltage Maximum Voltage Minimum Mid point Output Freq Frequency Output Freq Base Frequency Frequency VIf Curve Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit 0 1 0 0 to 100 0 Settings Factory Setting 0 0 The Upper Lower Limits to prevent operation errors machine damage If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz the Outpu
219. lanation The definition of the barking usage ED is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking When the brake resistor heats up the resistance would increase with temperature and brake torque would decrease accordingly Suggest cycle time is one minute 100 ED 1 70 100 Cycle Time Te For safety reasons install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor Together with the magnetic contactor MC in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 NFB MC R L1 512 Oe T L3 6 Thermal Overload Relay or temperature Absorber SA Surge Appendix B Accessories MOTOR R L1 U T1 S L2 VIT2 T L3 WIT3 VFD Series P P N N Brake Unit B1 Thermal Overload Relay
220. least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out and then confirm that the capacitors have fully It should be less than 25VDC discharged by measuring the voltage between 6 6 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Zim Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 3 4 Disconnect AC power before processing Only qualified personnel can install wire and maintain AC motor drives Please take off any metal objects such as watches and rings before operation And only insulated tools are allowed Never reassemble internal components or wiring Prevent static electricity Periodical Maintenance Ambient environment Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year Check the ambient temperature humidity vibration and see if Visual inspection and measurement 3 with equipment with standard there are any dust gas oil or HA specification water drops Check if there are any dangerous objects in the Visual inspection environment Voltage Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct Measure with multimeter with standard specification Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 7 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Keypa
221. load even if the maximum allowable power loss time is lt 5 seconds the operation mode as set in Pr 08 04 is not executed In that case it starts up normally ETE Base Block Speed Search Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable 1 Speed search starts with last frequency command 2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled 4 104 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Input B B signal Output frequency H Stop output voltage owe _ IO Disable B B signal 4 waiting time 08 07 08 08 Current Limit A for Speed SearchSpeed Output current A a FWD Run Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Time B B Fig 1 B B Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart Speed Search Current Attains Speed Search Level Output frequency _ 9 l Input B B signal H 1 Stop output voltage 1 gt 1 ae Disable B B signal LY i waiting time 08 07 08 08 Current Limit A r for Speed SearchSpeed i 1 i Speed Search pee 4 1 1 1 1 Synchronization speed detection Time 1 FWD Run 1 La m Fig 2 B B Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart
222. meter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad communication or PLC 4 86 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following Weights 25 2 2 2 5 9 O set internal terminal to be OFF Bit 5 4 3 2 Pince ernal terminal to be ON E For example if setting MI3 MI5 and MI6 to be ON Pr 04 28 should be set to bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X2 1X2 1X2 1X27 32 16 4 52 as shown the following 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weights 2 22 s 2 2 D OFF 1 Bt 17 1 o 1 o o mi Ea When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows Ozset internal terminal to be OFF Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 set internal terminal to be ON Bit Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 87 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 5 Multi step Speeds Parameters 05 00 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 05 05 05 06 05 07 05 08 05 09 05 10 05 11 05 12 05 13 05 14 1st Step Speed Frequency Unit 0 01 M 2nd Step Speed Frequency M 3rd Step Speed Frequency M 4th Step Speed Frequency M 5th Step Speed Frequency A 6th Step Speed Frequency A Tth Step Speed Frequency A 8th Step Sp
223. meters 08 00 DC Brake Current Level Unit 1 Settings 0 to 100 Factory Setting 0 Ea This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start up and stopping When setting DC Brake Current the Rated Current Pr 00 01 is regarded as 10096 It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved RI Brake Time during Start up Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 Ea This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command When the time has elapsed the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency Pr 01 05 ETE DC Brake Time during Stopping Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 Ea This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping If stopping with DC Brake is desired Pr 02 02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop ETE Start Point for DC Brake Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration Output Frequency Start Point for DC Braking DC Braking Time Time during during Stopping 01 05 StoPPingoo Minimum Output Frequency Run Stop ON OFF DC Braking Time Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 103 Chapter 4 Parameters
224. monitor in the communication item during executing PLC the ladder diagram will be shown as follows M1000 Ti KS 4 S B a g 4 fe 4 S END D 2 7 The Limit of PLC The protocol of PLC is 7 E 1 Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload download The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ WPR When setting P 00 04 to 2 the display will be the value in PLC register D1043 A 0 999 display gt B 1000 9999 display It will only display the first 3 digits The LED at the bottom right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X10 1000 C 10000 65535 display It will only display the first digits The LED at the bottom right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the right most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X100 10000 D 6 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 5 When it is changed to PLC2 RS 485 will be used by PLC 6 When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode the function to reset all parameters to factory setting is disabled i e Pr 00 02 can t be set to 9 or 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 7 Appendix D
225. mperature sensor error ef 35 Corrective Actions 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines 2 Torque boost too high Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 3 Acceleration Time too short Increase the Acceleration Time 4 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Deceleration Time too short Increase the Deceleration Time 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Sudden increase in motor loading Check for possible motor stall 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 When multi function input terminals MI3 MI9 are set to external fault the AC motor drive stops output U V and W 2 Give RESET command after fault has been cleared Return to the factory Return to the factory 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting Return to the factory 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting 2 Return to the factory Return to the factory Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 3 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and M
226. n Input i 11 06 Terminal Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi function Input 11 07 Terminal MIB Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Multi function Input 11 08 Terminal MI9 Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base block Multi function Input A ra 11 09 Terminal M110 Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency Multi function Input 16 Output shutoff stop Terminal MI12 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection Counter Trigger Signal Multi function Input 19 Counter reset TE Terminal MI11 14 E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 157 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Fact Customer Setting 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 13 10 Reserved 4 158 Revision June 2008
227. n input From above timing when input XO is a square wave of a period T output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 17 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 10 Delay Circuit 10 0 1 100 seconds When input is ON output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds K1000 0 1 seconds 100 seconds once input is OFF and T10 is ON Please refer to timing chart above Example 11 Output delay circuit in the following example the circuit is made up of two timers No matter input XO is ON or OFF output Y4 will be delay ik T5 T6 GO YA gt 3 seconds Example12 Extend Timer Circuit m In this circuit the total delay time from input TMR T11 Kn1 7 km is close and output Y1 is ON 1 2 T where T is clock period T12 T12 Y1 D 18 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 4 PLC Devices Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 1 Summary of DVP PLC Device Number Items Specifications Remarks Control Method Stored program cyclic scan system Processing Method Batch processing when END instruction is executed I O refresh instruction is available Execution Speed
228. n result use RST or ZRST instruction ZRST MO M2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 47 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 11 ZCP S4 S2 S D Zone Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnM T C D ZCP ZCPP 9 steps 8 als S2 els alfa le D a le Operands S1 Lower bound of zone comparison 52 Upper bound of zone comparison S Comparison value D Comparison result Explanations 1 gw ca The content in S1 should be smaller than the content in S2 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D When S1 gt S2 the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower upper bound The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction or b31 1 in 32 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 2 D 48 Designate device MO and operand D automatically occupies MO M1 and M2 When On ZCP instruction will be executed and one of MO M1 and M2 will be On When X10 Off ZCP instruction will not be executed and MO M1 and M2 remain their status
229. ncy Pumps and fans machine vibrations range Three skip frequency ranges can be set 4 34 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Carrier Frequency Setting Chapter 4 Parameters Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The carrier frequency can be 02 03 General application Low noise increased when required to reduce motor noise Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost xxi Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the frequency command is lost 02 06 For continuous by system malfunction the AC motor Air conditioners operation drive can still run Suitable for intelligent air conditioners Output Signal during Running T Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Signal available to stop braking brake 03 00 03 01 PEPE Provide a signal for release when the AC motor drive is General application running status running This signal will disappear 9 when the AC motor drive is free running Output Signal in Zero Speed ea Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequency is lower 03 00 03 01 Provide a signal for than the min output frequency a General application MM running status signal is given for external system or control wiring Output Signal at Desired Frequency SP gt Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the
230. nd program PLC will scan from address o to END command after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again D 5 9 Description of the Application Commands Mnemonic Steps Codes P API Command Function 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit 10 CMP Y Compare 7 Transmission 11 ZCP Y Zone compare 9 Comparison 12 Mov E Y Data Move 5 15 BMOV Y Block move 7 Four Perform the addition of 7 Y Fundamental 20 ADD BIN data Operations of LEUR 7 Arithmetic erform the subtraction A SUB of BIN data Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 45 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Steps API Codes ane Function command 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit Perform the 7 22 MUL Y multiplication of BIN data Perform the division of 7 Y quM BIN data 24 INC oo the addition of 3 25 DEC E Perform the subtraction 3 of 1 Rotation and 30 ROR Y Rotate to the right 5 Displacement 34 ROL Y Rotate to the left m 53 2 DHSCS X High speed counter 13 enable Control PID parameters 5 2 Y Special 139 FPID of inverter command for AC motor Control frequency of 5 Y drive 140 FREQ inverter 141 RPR Y Read the parameter 9 142 WPR Y Write the parameter 7 D 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands
231. nds The starting capacity AAN ig n ks jJ Pola ks 1 lt 1 5xthe capacity of AC _ motor drive kVA 1x coso Acceleration time 260 seconds The starting capacity m nslks jJ Poi Xthe capacity of AC motor _drive kVA 9 7x cos 1 I y 1 Nr 2 2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive A a Acceleration time lt 60 seconds nr Iu 1 M ks 1 5x the rated current of AC motor drive A a Acceleration time 260 seconds ny In 1 ks 1 lt the rated current of AC motor drive A C 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 2 3 When it is running continuously The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive kVA The requirement of load capacity kx Py ie capacity of AC motor drive kVA 1X coso The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive k x43 x Iu x10 lt the capacity of AC motor drive kVA The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive A lt the_rated_current_of AC motor drive A Symbol explanation Motor shaft output for load kW 7 Motor efficiency normally approx 0 85 coso Motor power factor normally approx 0 75 Motor rated voltage V Iu Motor rated current A for commercial power k Correction factor calculated from current
232. ne disturbances surges switching Input AC spikes short interruptions etc AC Line Reactor line reactor should be installed when Optional the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more or advanced capacity is activated The wiring distance should be lt 10m Refer to appendix B for details Zero phase reactors are used to Zero phase reduce radio noise especially when Reactor audio equipment is installed near the Ferrite Core inverter Effective for noise reduction Common on both the input and output sides Choke Attenuation quality is good for a wide Optional range from AM band to 10MHz Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor RF220X00A EMI filter To reduce electromagnetic interference Brake Used to reduce the deceleration time resistor and of the motor Please refer to the chart Brake unit in Appendix B for specific Brake Optional resistors Motor surge voltage amplitude Rue MR depends on motor cable length For Optional applications with long motor cable 720m it is necessary to install Skike caked mias Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 3 Main Circuit 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection Figure 1 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring For frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E11P 21P 23P 43P VFDO N
233. necessary If the contact works correctly Visual inspection Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit 6 10 Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there are any loose screws and Tighten the screws and press the connectors connectors firmly in place If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual inspection and smell If there is any crack damage r deformation or corrosion Vis al inspection 9 If there is any leaked liquid or Visual inspection deformation in capacitors Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Cooling fan of cooling system Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year If there is any abnormal sound or Visual aural inspection and turn the fan with hand turn off the power to overheating vibration before operation to see if it rotates 2 smoothly If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw O If there is any change of color due Change fan Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any obstruction in the Visual inspection o heat sink air intake or air outlet Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL
234. ng 10 0 Maximum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 Ea Please note the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal ACI Pr 04 19 should be set to 0 and AVI for analog voltage signal AVI2 Pr 04 19 should be set to 1 E The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values The min and max frequencies are based on Pr 01 00 during open loop control as shown in the following A 01 00 LI REPRE ERES i UA lei n ct emer 04 18 04 23 l 1 1 04 12 04 16 04 21 104 11 104 13 104 15 104 17 04 20 104 22 analog input 20mA 10V Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 73 Chapter 4 Parameters 01 00 60 00 Hz 04 14 70 04 18 50 04 12 30 04 16 0 analog input 04 11 0V 04 15 4mA 04 13 10V 04 17 20 Multi function Input Terminal MI1 MI2 2 wire 3 wire Operation Control Modes Settings 0 Factory Setting 0 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 3 wire Operation 04 04 2 wire 0 FWD STOP REV STOP 2 wire 1 FWD REV RUN STOP 4 74 There three different types of control modes External Terminal MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE FWD REV STOP ee Ml2 OPEN STOP CLOSE REV FWD STOP 5 MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE
235. ntiometer Bias 0 010 100 0 Keypad 0 404 01 Potentiometer Bias 1 Polarity Positive bias Negative bias Keypad 04 02 Potentiometer Gain 0 1 to 200 0 100 0 Em Keypad 0 Potentiometer 04 03 Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP 04 04 2 wire 3 wire Operation Control Modes 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 No negative bias command Negative bias REV motion enabled 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 3 wire operation No function Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 2 04 06 Multi function Input 3 Terminal MIA 4 5 04 07 Multi function Input 6 Terminal 5 T 8 9 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base block 11 Down Decrement master frequency 12 Counter Trigger Signal 13 Counter reset 14 E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 10 Up Increment master frequency 4 12 AN HI Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 7 Parameter lock enable Operation command selection external terminals Operation command selection keypad Operation command selection communication FWD REV
236. o 0 3i4 5 6 i EVeniStop stop i parity bit bit lt ___ __ 7 bit character _ 4 11 bit character frame a g Stop Stop i i i parity 4 7 bit character i amp 11 bit character frame 4 114 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 11 bit character frame For RTU 8 N 2 i Stop Stop i ibit bit i amp 8 bit character gt ____ 11 bit character frame gt 23 4 5 6 7 Start iEven Stop 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 parity bit 8 bit character i 11 bit character frame 8 0 1 8 Odd Stop 0 218 45 6 7 parity ibit f 8 bit character i d 11 bit character frame gt 8 N 1 f amp 4 8 bit character __ 4 10 bit character frame 8 2 Start l i Even Stop 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 yriyibi I amp 8 bit character i 4 12 bit character frame gt 8 0 2 1 2 3 4 5 Odd Stop i i parity bit lt _ 8 bit character _ i lt _ __ 12 bit character frame
237. o 255 0V 01 35 Vmid Motor 2 Vmid Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Minimum Output 01 36 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 2 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 37 Voltage Vmin Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Maximum Voltage 01 38 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 3 Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 39 Voltage Vmax Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Mid Point 01 40 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 3 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 41 mig Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Minimum Output 01 42 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 3 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 43 Voltage Vmin Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 4 6 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation racio customer Setting Source of First 402 00 Master Frequency Command Source of First 402 01 Operation Command 02 02 Stop Method PWM Carrier 02 03 Frequency Selections Motor Direction 02 04 Control 02 05 Line Start Lockout 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved 1 0 to 10V from AVI 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 0 Digital keypad 1
238. o d 3600 sec Factory Setting 60 0 This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before warning see Pr 10 09 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time Ea If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal 1009 Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals for PID feedback error Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warning and RAMP to stop 1 Warning and COAST to stop 2 Warning and keep operating 4 134 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This function is only for ACI signal Ea AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback are abnormal according to Pr 10 16 Over the PID Detection Value Unit 0 1 0 0 to 10 0 Settings Factory Setting 1 0 Ea This function is only for ACI signal Ea This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value Refer to PID control block diagram in Pr 10 06 for detail X Source of PID Set point Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr 10 00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz PID Offset Level Unit 0 1 Settings 1 0 to 50 0 Factory Setting 10 0 EXE Detection Time of PID Offset Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 300 0 sec Factory Setting 5 0 Ea This parameter is used to set detection of the offs
239. o fuse breaker 15E23P Brake Resistor Optional ABRE BUE _ Unit Optional O R L1 S L2 T L3 EO u T1 V T2 O W T3 Motor IM je MC R SD S 5 Q T amp 5 re Figure 2 For frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C For frame VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E43C Brake Resistor Optional Motor IM 3 Motor 2 13 BRL No fuse breaker 1 NEB B1 B2 TP R L1 U T4 gt V T2 E I7 MUS W T3 E E Figure 3 For Frame A VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T E BR Brake Resistor No fuse breaker eon B1 B2 d 2 R L1 U T1 9 S SS S L2 vit2 amp T T L3 wits FGFS Revision June 2008 04 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 AC line input terminals 1 phase 3 phase U T1 V T2 W T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3 phase induction motor B1 B2 Connections for Brake resistor optional B1 Connections for External Brake
240. o mount equipment that runs at varying speed Motor imbalance special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency To avoid resonances use the Skip frequencies The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz Special motors 1 Pole changing Dahlander motor The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor Please check before operation and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully When changing the pole number the motor needs to be stopped first If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too high please let the motor free run to stop coast Submersible motor The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully With long motor cable between AC motor drive and motor available motor torque is reduced Explosion proof Ex motor Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the Ex requirements Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for Ex areas with special precautions Gear reduction motor The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed and for high speed operation needs to be considered carefully Synchronous motor The rated current and starting current are higher than
241. o reset the drive Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 75 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Accel Decel Inhibit When the command is active acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed Accel Decel Time Used to select the one of 2 Accel Decel Times Pr 01 09 to 7 Selection Pr 01 12 See explanation at the end of this table Command Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 for Jog control Jog Operation 8 Control NOTE Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped Refer to parameter Pr 01 13 Pr 01 15 Parameter value 09 programs a Multi function Input Terminals for external Base Block control External Base NOTE When a Base Block signal is received the AC motor 9 Block drive will block all output and the motor will free run When Refer to Pr 08 06 base block control is deactivated the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed and then accelerate to Master Frequency 46 UP Increase Increase decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active When both inputs are active at the same time the Master Frequency q4 DOWN Decrease increase decrease is halted Please refer to Pr 02
242. o stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop When the 2 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the motor stop method Pr 02 02 will force setting to 1 This setting Pr 02 02 can t be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives valid stop command or detects External Fault Ramp the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 according to the deceleration time and then stops Coast the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped 1 It is recommended to use ramp to stop for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped The deceleration time has to be set accordingly 2 If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large it is recommended to select coast to stop For example blowers punching machines centrifuges and pumps 4 52 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency Frequency output output freq
243. obtained from the keypad Negative feedback means target value feedback Positive feedback means target value feedback Proportional Gain P Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain P If the other two gains and D are set to zero proportional control is the only one effective With 1096 deviation error and P 1 the output will be P x10 x Master Frequency 4 132 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters gt The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning Em Time 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 0 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable Ea This parameter specifies integral control continual sum of the deviation and associated gain I When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed the output is equal to the input deviation once the integral time setting is attained The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning X Derivative Control D Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 1 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 Ea This parameter specifies derivative control rate of change of the input and associated gain D With this parameter set to 1 the PID output is equal to differential time x present deviation previous deviation It increases the response speed but it may cause over compensation
244. occurs 4 130 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 09 11 M Time out Detection for USB Card Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable COM port for PLC Communication NOT for VFD E C models Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 RS485 1 USB card Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 131 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 10 PID Control PID Set Point Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys 2 AVI 0 10VDC 3 ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 1001 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC Note that the measured variable feedback controls the output frequency Hz Select input terminal accordingly Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr 10 00 Master Frequency When Pr 10 00 is set to 2 or 3 the set point Master Frequency for PID control is obtained from the AVI or ACI AVI2 external terminal 0 to 10V or 4 20mA or from multi step speed When Pr 10 00 is set to 1 the set point is
245. olutions f Hz 50 2sec 10sec 4 MI 25 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 175 X 2 It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles Example 2 Assume that motor speed is 1 5Hz the delay time at 10Hz is 10 sec Pr 01 21 10 and the deceleration time from 60Hz to OHz is 40 seconds The delay time at 1 5Hz is 1 5 sec and the deceleration from 1 5Hz to OHz is 1 sec The rotation speed n 120 X 1 5 4 rpm min 1 5 2 rpm sec 0 75 rpm sec The revolution numbers 1 5 2X 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 revolutions f Hz t Ml 25 1 5sec 1 Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 1 5 X 2n It also means that the motor will stop after running 1 5 circles Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 1 Unit 0
246. ommand via Digital Keypad Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 19 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Digital When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Keypad priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Communication Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 20 Selection Pr 02 01 setting When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Communication priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 This function has top priority to set the direction for running If 21 Forward Reverse Pr 02 04 0 Used to select the first second frequency command source Refer Source of second to Pr 02 00 and 02 09 22 frequency command enabled ON 2 Frequency command source OFF 1 Frequency command source Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 77 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 ON Run PLC Program OFF Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC program When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the 2i NOT for VFD E C PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be models stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC stat
247. on Item Speed and torque characteristics Time Overload Starting ratings capacity torque Friction load and weight load Liquid viscous load Inertia load Load with power transmission Constant torque Constant output Decreasing torque Decreasing output Constant load Load Shock load characteristics Repetitive load High starting torque Low starting torque Continuous operation Short time operation e Long time operation at medium low speeds Maximum output current instantaneous e Constant output current continuous Maximum frequency Base frequency e Power supply transformer capacity or percentage impedance Voltage fluctuations and unbalance e e Number of phases single phase protection Frequency Mechanical friction losses in wiring e e Load type Load speed and torque characteristics Duty cycle modification e Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 1 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 1 Capacity Formulas 1 When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1 5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity n GD x x lt 1 5xthe capacity of AC _ motor drive kVA 375 fi 2 When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor 973 x x cos o 2 1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive a Acceleration time lt 60 seco
248. on ANDF Falling edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y v Y B Explanations ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO X4 LD X0 Load A contact of XO 30 17 ANDF X1 X1 falling edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil D 42 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ORP Rising edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y Y Y Y Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of X0 1 ORP X1 X1 rising edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORF Falling edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y 2 Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram 1 Command code Operation LD ORF OUT Load A contact of X0 x1 X1 falling edge detection in parallel connection Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision June 200
249. on of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register D 32 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of X0 1 OR 1 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORI Parallel connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Y Y Y iss Explanations The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD x1 Load contact A of X0 ORI x1 Connect to contact B of 1 1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANB Series connection Multiple Circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the ANB calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register Revision June 2008 0
250. operation command source Right key Move the cursor to the right PROG DATA Used to enter programming parameters STOP RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred RUN Key Start AC drive operation Descriptions B 16 The custom unit u A Press 0 read 3 Press A about 2 sec or until it s flashi AC motor drive The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U V and W The output current present at terminals U V and W to change the mode to READ Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad PUOG It can read 4 groups of parameters to PUOG read to change the mode to SAVE Press PROG DATA for ng then write the parameters from the digital keypad PUOG to AC drive If it has saved it will show the type of Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Display Message Descriptions The specified parameter setting The actual value stored in the specified parameter External Fault End displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have A v or keys displays if the input is invalid Communication Error Please check the AC motor drive user manual Chapter 5 Group 9 Communication Parameter for more details E 5 been accepted After a parameter value h
251. orque slip compensation auto tuning adjustable carrier frequency output frequency limits parameter Operation Functions lock reset vector control PID control external counter MODBUS communication abnormal reset abnormal re start power saving fan control sleep wake frequency 1st 2nd frequency source selections 1st 2nd frequency source combination NPN PNP selection parameters for motor 0 to motor 3 DEB and OOB Out Of Balance Detection for washing machine Alarm Output Contact Over voltage over current under voltage external fault overload ground Protection Functions fault overheating electronic thermal IGBT short circuit PTC 6 key 7 segment LED with 4 digit 5 status LEDs master frequency output Display Keypad optional frequency output current custom units parameter values for setup and lock faults RUN STOP RESET FWD REV PLC VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E43C Built in EMI Filter For 230V 1 phase and 460V 3 phase models Built in Brake Chopper Enclosure Rating IP20 Pollution Degree 2 Installation Location Altitude 1 000 m or lower keep from corrosive gasses liquid and dust o o o A Ambient Temperature 10 C to 50 C 40 C for side
252. orresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Open NO or contact a Otherwise you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Closed NC or contact b Many relays will need many bits such as 8 bits makes up a byte 2 bytes can make up a word 2 words makes up double word When using many relays to do calculation such as add subtraction or shift you could Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function use byte word or double word Furthermore the two equipments timer and counter in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times In conclusion each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit When using these equipments the corresponding content will be read by bit byte or word Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1 You couldn t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON OFF via WPLSoft The contacts contact a b can be used unlimitedly If there is no input signal the corresponding input relay could be empty and can t be used with other functions Equipment indication method X1
253. oup 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 User Parameters Basic Parameters Operation Method Parameters Output Function Parameters Input Function Parameters Multi Step Speed Parameters Protection Parameters Motor Parameters Special Parameters Communication Parameters PID Control Parameters Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card PG function Parameters for Extension Card Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 1 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 1 Summary of Parameter Settings The parameter can be set during operation Group 0 User Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 00 00 Identity Code of the AC motor drive Read only 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Read only Tg 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V 400 03 Start up Display Selection 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 3 Multifunction displa
254. output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 100 Bias adjustment 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 10V 100 100 OHz ov 10V Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 100 04 11 Minimum AVI Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 04 12 Minimum AVI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 04 13 Maximum AVI Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Maximum AVI Frequency percentage of 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 EXE Minimum ACI Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 Minimum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 4 72 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Maximum ACI Current Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 o1 Terminal Mode Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 ACI 1 AVI2 ETE Minimum AVI2 Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 Minimum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 ETE Maximum AVI2 Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setti
255. ower Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 2101H Status of AC drive Bit 0 1 00B RUN LED is off STOP LED is on The AC motor Drive stops 01B RUN LED blinks STOP LED is on When AC motor drive decelerates to stop 10B RUN LED is on STOP LED blinks When AC motor drive is standby 11B RUN LED is on STOP LED is off When AC motor drive runs Bit 2 1 JOG command Bit 3 4 00B FWD LED is on REV LED is off When AC motor drive runs forward 01B FWD LED is on REV LED blinks When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward 10B FWD LED blinks REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse 11B FWD LED is off REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs reverse Bit 5 7 Reserved Bit 8 1 Master frequency Controlled by communication interface Bit 9 1 Master frequency controlled by analog signal Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 125 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 126 Content Address Function 1 Operation command controlled by BIETO communication interface Bit 11 15 Reserved 2102H Frequency command F 2103H Output frequency H 2104H Output current AXXX X 2105H Reserve
256. p frequency and time gt detection time it will go in sleep mode When min output frequency lt PID frequency lt lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled output frequency lt sleep frequency and time gt detection time frequency will be 0 in sleep mode If sleep function is disabled frequency command lower bound frequency When PID frequency min output frequency and sleep function is enabled output frequency lt sleep frequency and time gt detection time output frequency 0 in sleep mode If output frequency lt sleep frequency but time lt detection time frequency command lower frequency If sleep function is disabled output frequency 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By PID control 1 By Minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 Ea This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 137 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 11 Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 11 parameters See Appendix B for details Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Multi function Output Terminal MO3 RA3 Multi function Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Multi function Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Multi function Outp
257. part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order 1 1 1 Nameplate Information Example for 1HP 0 75kW 3 phase 230V AC motor drive AC Drive Model MODEL VFD007E23A Input Spec INPUT 3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz 5 1A Output Spec OUTPUT 3PH 0 240V 4 2A 1 6kVA 0 75kW 1HP Output Frequency Range FREQUENCY RANGE 0 1 400Hz Serial Number amp Bar Code o1 ogee 1230 Power Board Software Version control Board 02 03 1 1 2 Model Explanation A Standard drive FD 007 E 23 A C CANopen ET Lo P Cold plate drive frame A only Version Type T Frame built in brake chopper Mains Input Voltage 11 115V Single phase 21 230V Single phase 23 230V Three phase 43 460V Three phase E Series Applicable motor capacity 002 0 25 HP 0 2kW 037 5 HP 3 7kW 004 0 5 HP 0 4kW 055 7 5 HP 5 5kW 007 1 HP 0 75kW 075 10 HP 7 5kW 015 2 HP 1 5kW 110 15 HP 11kW 022 3 HP 2 2kW Series Name Variable Frequency Drive 1 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 007E23A 7T 7 01 1230 Production number Production week Production year 2007 Production factory T Taoyuan W Wujiang Model 230V 3 phase 1HP 0 75kW If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems please contact your distributor
258. peed search operation only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr 08 08 When the output current is less than the value of Pr 08 08 the AC motor drive output frequency is at speed synchronization point The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss Maximum Allowable Maximum Power Loss Time Allowable Power Power Input Speed Synchronization Speed Search Beeson 08 04 1 B 08 04 2 Output Baseblock Time i __ Baseblock Time Frequency j 08 06 08 06 Output Momentary Power Loss Operation Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 EAEE Skip Frequency Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea These parameters set the Skip Frequencies It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output These six parameters should be set as follows Pr 08 09 gt Pr 08 10 gt Pr 08 11 gt Pr 08 12 gt Pr 08 13 gt Pr 08 14 The frequency ranges may be overlapping internal frequency command setting frequency EXE Auto Restart Afte
259. perands Function 15 BMOV P S D n Block Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K H KnX kny KnM T C D BMOV BMOVP 7 steps D a fio e a e alee Operands S Start of source devices D Start of destination devices Number of data to be moved Explanations 1 Range of n 1 512 2 the specifications of each model for their range of use 3 contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used Program Example 1 When X10 On the contents in registers DO D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 D23 X10 H cenov DO D20 K4 Program Example 2 Assume the bit devices KnX KnY KnM and KnS are designated for moving the number of digits of S and D has to be the same i e their n has to be the same D 50 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 1000 Hieno po p20 Ka Program Example 3 MO YO M1 Y1 M2 Y2 M3 M4 Y4 M5 Y5 Me Y6 M7 Y7 M8 Y10 M9 Y11 M10 Y12 M11 Y13 To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and
260. power reactor Y NM A Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 f a motor Fi small capacity AC motor drive Ld B 13 Appendix B Accessories B 5 Zero Phase Reactor RF220X00A Dimensions are in millimeter and inch Recommended Wire Cable Size Wirin type Qty Method Note awo mm Nominal mm lt 10 lt 5 3 lt 55 1 aci Single core Diagram lt 2 lt 336 lt 38 4 lt 12 3 3 lt 35 1 piagram Three core lt 1 lt 424 lt 50 4 Diagram Note 600V Insulated unshielded Cable Diagram A Please wind each wire 4 times around the core The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible Zero Phase Reactor RILI 1 512 Power Supply B 14 Diagram B Please put all wires through 4 cores in series without winding Zero Phase Reactor Van x PE EE Supply WIT 5 Note 1 The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i e the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors Note 2 Only the phase conductors should pass through not the earth core or screen Note 3 When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated emissions from the cable Revision J
261. ps x Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INC INCP 3 steps D alele Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 55 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Operands D Destination device Explanations 1 If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will plus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions INCP In 16 bit operation 32 767 pluses 1 and obtains 32 768 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 647 pluses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 648 Program Example When goes from Off to On the content in DO pluses 1 automatically Hi wes API Mnemonic Operands Function 25 DEC P D Decrement Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps SF x Y M K KnM T C D DEC steps D amp slels Operands D Destination Explanations 1 If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will minus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions DECP In 16 bit operation 32 768 minuses 1 and obtains 32 767 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 648 minuses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 647 Program Example When goes from Off to On the content in DO minuses
262. put frequency 1 1 07 13 Decel time selection for NS momentary power loss DEB return time Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 111 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 9 Communication Parameters There is a built in RS 485 serial interface marked RJ 45 near to the control terminals The pins are defined below RS 485 NOT for VFD E C models 8 1 Serial interface 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND 4 SG 5 SG 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved The pins definition for VFD E C models please refer to chapter E 1 2 Each VFD E AC motor drive has a pre assigned communication address specified by Pr 09 00 The RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address ETE Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting 1 If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS 485 serial communication the communication address for this drive must be set via this parameter And the communication address for each AC motor drive must be different and unique 0901 Transmission Speed Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps bits second 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master PLC etc and AC motor drive 09 02 A Transmission Fault Treatment Factory Setting 3 Settings 0 Warn and keep opera
263. quency Pr 01 00 z Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 ACM internalcircuit Set up Pr 04 15 Pr 04 18 Analog output meter 0 to 10V 2mA bon Tm Impedance 100kQ AFM Output current 2mA max iT patentiometer Resolution 8 bits ax 2m4 Range 0 10VDC internal circuit ACM Function Pr 03 03 to Pr 03 04 NOTE Control signal wiring size 18 AWG 0 75 mm with shielded wire Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 19 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Analog inputs AVI ACI ACM Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible lt 20m with proper grounding If the noise is inductive connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive please connect a capacitor 0 1 F and above and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams AVI ACI ACM ferrite core wind each wires 3 times or more around the core Digital inputs MI1 MI6 DCM When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce Digital outputs MO1 MCM General Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity see wiring diagrams When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect a surge absorber or fly back diode across the coil and check the polarity Keep control wiring as
264. quency command Bit 0 1 EF external fault on 2002H Bit 1 1 Reset Bit 2 15 Reserved Status Error code monitor 2100H 0 No error occurred Read only 1 Over current oc Over voltage ov IGBT Overheat oH1 Power Board Overheat 0H2 Overload1 oL 1 Overload2 oL2 External fault EF 2 3 4 5 Overload oL 6 8 9 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground Fault GFF 13 Low voltage Lv 14 PHL Phase Loss 2100H 15 Base Block 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software protection enabled codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure CF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure CF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 4 124 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 2100H 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 P
265. r Fault Unit 1 Settings 0 to 10 Factory Setting 0 0 Disable Only after an over current OC or over voltage OV fault occurs the AC motor drive can be reset restarted automatically up to 10 times Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset restart operation after any fault has occurred When enabled the AC motor drive will restart with speed search which starts at the frequency before the fault To set the waiting time before restart after a fault please set Pr 08 07 Base Block Time for Speed Search EXE Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 6000 sec Factory Setting 60 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 107 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter should be used conjunction with Pr 08 15 For example If Pr 08 15 is set to 10 and Pr 08 16 is set to 600s 10 min and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10 08 17 Automatic Energy saving Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Energy saving operation disabled 1 Energy saving operation enabled Output Voltage 100 70 During auto energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load The output voltage is maximally lowered to 70 of the normal output voltage Output Frequency EXE Automatic Voltage Regulation AVR F
266. r cables to connect Pun de to LonTalk system Terminals 1 and 2 should be used as one group and the same for terminals 3 and 4 AJOJN B 10 2 5 LED Indications There are three LEDs in front panel of CME LW01 If the communication is normal power LED SP LED should be green red LED means abnormal communication and service LED should be OFF If LEDs display do not match refer to user manual for details B 10 3 Profibus Communication Module CME PD01 B 28 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 10 3 1 Panel Appearance Address Switches NETLED SPLED 1 QD SS NETSP ADDH ADDL amp t UIT RS 485 RJ45 i 1 Reserved 2 EM gt 3 GND 456 ad 5 SG M 6 Reserved b Ja 7 Reserved p M 8 Reserved Profibus DP Interface DB9 1 SP LED Indicating the connection status between VFD E and CME PD01 NET LED Indicating the connection status between CME PD01 and PROFIBUS DP Address Switches Setting the address of CME PD01 on PROFIBUS DP network RS 485 Interface RJ45 Connecting to VFD E and supply power to CME PDO1 a RON PROFIBUS DP Interface DB9 9 PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS DP network 6 Extended Socket 4 PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS DP network Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 29 Appendix B Accessories B 30 B 10 3 2 Dimensions 72 2
267. r drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of 16 Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled If the status of terminal is changed AC motor drive will restart from OHz ig Parameter lock When this setting is enabled all parameters will be locked and Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 enable write parameters is disabled 4 141 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Operation ON Operation command via Ext Terminals Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 18 Selection Pr 02 01 setting external Pr 02 01 is disabled if this parameter value 18 is set See the explanation below this table terminals Operation ON Operation command via Digital Keypad Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 19 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Digital Pr 02 01 is disabled if this parameter value 19 is set See the Keypad explanation below this table Operation ON Operation command via Communication Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 20 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Pr 02 01 is disabled if this parameter value 20 is set See the Communication explanation below this table This function has top priority to set the direction for running If 21 Forward Reverse Pr 02 04 0 Used to select the first second frequency command source Refer Source of second to pr 02 00 and 02 09 22 frequency ON 2nd Frequency command source command enabled O
268. rate setting error Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 33 Appendix B Accessories B 34 ERROR LED LED Status OFF Single Flash Red Double Flash Red Red ON SP LED LED Status OFF LED Blinking Red Red ON LED Blinking Green Green ON At least one of error counter of the CANopen controller has reached or exceeded the warning level too many error frames Warning limit reached A guard event or heartbeat event has Error control event occurred The CANopen controller is bus off Check your communication setting in VFD E drives 19200 lt 8 N 2 gt RTU Check the connection between VFD E drive and CME COP01 Connection failure No card is correct connection 2 Re wire the VFD E connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct CME COP01 returns error Check the PLC program ensure the code index and sub index is correct Normal Communication is normal LED Descriptions State LED ON LED OFF LED blinking LED single flash LED double flash Description Constantly on Constantly off Flash on for 0 2s and off for 0 2s On for 0 2s and off for 1s On for 0 2s off for 0 2s on for 0 2s and off for 1s Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 11 DIN Rail B 11 1 MKE DRA fg Y ds HESS Z5 x au E
269. rd represent 00000000 FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system The relations among bit nibble byte word and double word of binary number are shown as follows DW lt Double Word wi wo lt Word BY3 BY2 BY1 BYO Byte NB7 NB6 NBS NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NBO lt Nibble 5 2 Number OCT The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP PLC use octal number Example External input XO X7 X10 X17 device number Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 21 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 22 External output YO Y7 Y10 Y17 device number Decimal Number DEC The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP PLC system To be the setting value of timer T or counter C such as TMR CO K50 constant To be the device number of M T C and D For example M10 T30 device number To be operand in application command such as MOV K123 DO K constant BCD Binary Code Decimal BCD It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the four numbers of decimal number BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7 segment display to be display Hexadecimal Number HEX The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP PLC system To be operand in application command For example
270. rive Settings Read Only Factory setting Ea Pr 00 00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive The capacity rated current rated voltage and the max carrier frequency relate to the identity code Users can use the following table to check how the rated current rated voltage and max carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code Ea Pr 00 01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct 115V 230V Series kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 HP 0 25 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 Pr 00 00 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Rated Output Current A 1 6 2 5 4 2 7 5 11 0 17 25 33 Max Carrier 45kHz Frequency 460V Series kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 HP 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 15 Pr 00 00 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Rated Output Current A 1 5 2 5 4 2 5 5 8 5 13 18 24 Max Carrier 15kHz Frequency EIS Parameter Reset Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 115V 220V 440V Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 37 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This parameter allows t
271. rrent of the capacitors may cause voltage dip The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs during operation Correct wiring M1 reactor AC motor drive motor Me A 2 PN 6 CY YY AC motor drive motor e Mn YY i AC motor drive Ne lua Application 2 Question Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches on off These spikes may damage the mains circuit Correct wiring Silicon Controlled Rectifier power reactor 2 aa DC AC motor drive reactor A g motor A Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Application 3 Question Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances surges switching spikes short interruptions etc The AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500 or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity or the mains wiring distance lt 10m When the mains power capacity is too large line impedance will be small and the charge current will be too high This may damage AC motor drive due to higher rectifier temperature Correct wiring large capacity
272. rt circuit is removed and the other points above are checked it should be sent back to manufacturer Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range Check for possible voltage transients DC bus over voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration Either increase the Decel Time or add an optional brake resistor and brake unit Check whether the required brake power is within the specified limits 6 1 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Name Overheating Heat sink temperature too high Low voltage The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value Overload The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current NOTE The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150 of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip Overload 2 Motor overload CC current clamp OV hardware error GFF hardware error 1 External Base Block Refer to Pr 08 07 6 2 FONS Corrective Actions Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins Check the fan and clean it Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation See chapter 1 Check whether the input voltage falls
273. running 4 100 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level Pr 07 15 the drive will act n Duro according to 07 17 and display amp amp If the temperature decreases below the result Pr 07 15 minus Pr 07 16 the warning display will disappear EZHN Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Unit 2 Settings 0 9999 is 0 19998ms Factory Setting 100 Ea This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc Motor Rated Current Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 3096 FLA to 12096 FLA Factory Setting FLA EZBR No load Current Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 096 FLA to 9096 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA X Torque Compensation Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 EZE X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 0722 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Motor Pole Number Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Motor Rated Current Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA 07 26 Motor No load Current Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Sett
274. s This example shows the influence of changing the bias When the input is OV the output frequency is 10 Hz At mid point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency To use the full potentiometer range please refer to Example 3 The value of external input voltage current 0 8 33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10 60Hz Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 69 Chapter 4 Parameters Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 16 7 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Bias E Adjustment LU OHz OV 5V 10V Bias adjustment 10Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 16 7 Gain 100 Example 3 Use of bias and gain for use of full range This example also shows a popular method The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired In addition to signals of 0 to 10V the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V or any value under 10V Regarding the setting please refer to the following examples Pr 01 00260Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 20 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 83 3 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command 60Hz e Bias 10Hz Gain 10V 10V 2V 100 83 3 2V 70v 5V 10V Biasadjustment 1
275. s Therefore Y 1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 15 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 5 Interlock control x1 X3 Y2 Y1 Y2 The figure above is the circuit of interlock control Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2 Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time once one of them acts and the other won t act This is called interlock Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time Y1 and Y2 won t act at the same time due to up to down scan of ladder diagram For this ladder diagram Y1 has higher priority than Y2 Example 6 Sequential Control 1 bo If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND M function as shown in the left side Y1 is an x2 4 Y1 input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting L C2 5 In this way Y1 and Y2 can execute in Y2 sequential Example 7 Oscillating Circuit The period of oscillating circuit is AT AT D 16 Y1 v 1 ki AT AT The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1 In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1 Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON Finally coil Y1 will be OFF The result of repeated scan coil Y will ou
276. s Drive Research Triangle Park NC 27709 U S A TEL 1 919 767 3813 FAX 1 919 767 3969 EUROPE Deltronics Netherlands B V Eindhoven Office De Witbogt 15 5652 AG Eindhoven The Netherlands TEL 31 40 259 28 50 FAX 31 40 259 28 51 We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice 5011640604 200806 13 O4EE A ELTA WE2 E User Manual High Performance Flexible Options Micro Type AC Motor Drives Preface Thank you for choosing DELTA s high performance VFD E Series The VFD E Series is manufactured with high quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available This manual is to be used for the installation parameter setting troubleshooting and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive To guarantee safe operation of the equipment read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference To ensure the safety of operators and equipment only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation start up and maintenance Always read this manual thoroughly before using VFD E series AC Motor Drive especially the WARNING DANGER and CAUTION notes Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage If you have any questions please contact your d
277. s forth a 32 bit product The higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16 bit are stored in D20 On Off of the most left bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value D 54 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 23 DIV S4 S2 D Division Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps 9n x Y M K H KnY KnM T C D DIV Dive 7 steps 5 els e e lee S ele e lela D a e le Te Operands S4 Dividend Divisor D Quotient and remainder Explanations 4 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices 2 This instruction divides S4 and S in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S4 S and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit instruction Quotient Remainder G2 CD CDD 1 b15 ni b00 b15 b00 615 b00 b15 b00 Program Example When On DO will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in D21 On Off of the highest bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value H DIV D10 020 DIV D10 K4Y0 Operands Function 24 INC P D Increment Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Ste
278. shows I t curves for 150 output power for 1 minute Operation time seconds 350 300 50Hz or more 250 10Hz 5H 200 fas 150 100 50 Load 250 factor Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 93 Chapter 4 Parameters Present Fault Record Second Most Recent Fault Record Third Most Recent Fault Record Fourth Most Recent Fault Record Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Factory Setting 0 Readings 0 No fault 1 Over current 2 Over voltage ov 3 IGBT Overheat oH1 4 Power Board Overheat 0H2 5 Overload oL 6 Overload oL1 7 Motor Overload oL2 8 External Fault EF 9 Hardware protection failure HPF 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 13 Reserved 14 Phase loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software password protection codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ Failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 4 94 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parame
279. sion June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters STX Address 01H Address Low 0 Function 86H Address High 4 Exception code 02H Function Low 8 CRC CHK Low C3H Function High 6 CRC CHK High A1H 0 Exception code m LRC CHK Low KE LRC CHK High T END 1 CR END 0 LF The explanation of exception codes Exception code Explanation Illegal function code 01 The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive Illegal data address 02 The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive Illegal data value 03 The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive 04 Slave device failure The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action Communication time out 10 If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 3 7 Communication program of PC The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode on a PC in C language include lt stdio h gt include lt dos h gt Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 127 Chapter 4 Parameters include lt conio h gt include lt process h gt define PORT 0 0 8 the a
280. sion June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix A Specifications Voltage Class Model Number VFD XXXE 460V Class Output Rating Input Rating Rated Output Capacity kVA Rated Output Current A Maximum Output Voltage V Output Frequency Hz Carrier Frequency kHz Rated Input Current A Rated Voltage Frequency Voltage Tolerance Frequency Tolerance Cooling Method Weight kg Pie fae se ee oe as T 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage 0 1 600 Hz 1 15 3 phase 1 9 3 2 4 3 7 1 11 2 14 19 26 3 phase 380 480V 50 60Hz 10 342 528V 5 47 63Hz Natural Cooling Fan Cooling 12 12 12 19 J 19 42 42 42 Control Characteristics Operating Characteristics Control System Frequency Setting Resolution Output Frequency Resolution Torque Characteristics Regenerated Brake Torque Overload Endurance Skip Frequency Accel Decel Time Stall Prevention Level DC Brake Pattern Frequency Setting Keypad External Signal Operation Keypad Setting Signal External Signal Multi function Input Signal General Specifications SPWM Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation control V f or sensorless vector control 0 01Hz 0 01Hz Including the auto torque auto slip compensation starting torque can be 150 at 3 0Hz 150 of rated current for 1 minute Three zones setting range 0 1 600Hz 0 1 to 600 seconds 2 Independent settings for Accel Decel t
281. ss for writing S2 Register that saves the written data Program Example 1 Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the VFD E into DO and H2101 into D1 When MO ON it will write the data D10 to the address H2001 of the VFD E When M1 ON it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the VFD E i e start the AC motor drive 4 When M2 ON it will write the data in H1 to the address H2000 of the VFD E i e stop the AC motor drive 5 When data is written successfully M1017 will be ON WPR D10 H2001 WPRP H2 H2000 M2 WPRP H2000 M1017 Cw Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 61 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 141 FPID 1 S2 3 54 PID control for the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps Bp x Y M K KnY KnM T C D FPIDP 9 steps 1 S2 S3 54 Operands S1 PID Set Point Selection 0 4 S2 Proportional gain P 0 100 S3 Integral Time 0 10000 S4 Derivative control D 0 100 Explanation 1 This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly including Pr 10 00 PID set point selection Pr 10 02 Proportional gain P Pr 10 03 Integral time I and Pr 10 04 Derivative control D Program Example 1 Assume that when MO ON S1 is set to 0
282. ssure 86 106 kPa Installation Site Altitude 1000 2 Vibration lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max Temperature 20 C 60 C 4 F 140 F Relative Humidity Atmosphere pressure Storage lt 90 no condensation allowed Transportation 86 106 kPa lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max 2 good for a factory type environment Vibration Pollution Degree Minimum Mounting Clearances Frame A Mounting Clearances Option 1 10 to 50 C Option 2 10 to 40 C Air flow Air Flow 1 8 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B and C Mounting Clearances Option 1 10 to 50 C Option 2 10 to 40 C Air flow For VFD E P series heat sink system example 4 CS a la lt lt Air extracting apparatus User s heat sink should comply Duct temperature lt 40 with following conditions Air flow speed 2 2m sec 1 Flatness 0 1mm 2 Roughness 6um 3 Grease 10um 12um 4 Screw torque 16Kgf cm 5 Recommended temperature 80 f Control panel dust collector 04 1 Operating storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor driv
283. t 00 06 Power Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display HHH Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 39 Chapter 4 Parameters Control Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display HHH Password Input Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 2 times of wrong password The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set Pr 00 09 Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts After consecutive failed attempts a blinking codE will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password nr Password Set Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr 00 08 1 Password has been set To set password to protect your parameter settings If the display shows 0 no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr 00 08 All parameters can then be changed including Pr 00 09 The first time you can set a password directly After successful setting of password the display will show 1 Be sure to record the password for later use To cancel the parameter lock set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr 00 08 The password consists of min 1 digits and max 4 digits How to make the password valid again after decoding by
284. t Frequency will be limited to 50Hz If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz the Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is set to 1 0Hz then any Command Frequency between 1 0 10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit 01 07 The Output Frequency Lower Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 08 100 Acceleration Time 1 Taccel 1 Unit 0 1 0 01 INIM v Deceleration Time 1 Tdecel 1 Unit 0 1 0 01 Acceleration Time 2 Taccel 2 Unit 0 1 0 01 Deceleration Time 2 Tdecel 2 Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 sec 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 10 0 Acceleration deceleration time 1 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3 MI12 to 7 set Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 7 or Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to 7 Time Unit Settings 0 Unit 0 1 sec 1 Unit 0 01 sec 4 44 Factory Setting 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 The rate is linear unless S Curve is Enabled see Pr 01 17 Ea The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 down to 0 Hz The rate is linear unless S Cur
285. t low speeds for long time 5 10 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 Fault Code Information The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages Once a fault is detected the corresponding protective functions will be activated The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication i tae Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal 6 1 1 Common Problems and Solutions Fault Name Fault Descriptions Over current Abnormal increase in current a m Over voltage The DC bus voltage has U exceeded its maximum allowable value Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Corrective Actions Check if motor power corresponds with the AC motor drive output power Check the wiring connections to U T1 V T2 W T3 for possible short circuits Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits also to ground Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor Increase the Acceleration Time Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a sho
286. ters 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 39 40 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 Contrsol Board CPU READ failure cF2 1 ACI signal error AErr Reserved Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 Reserved Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 Ea In Pr 06 08 to Pr 06 12 the five most recent faults that occurred are stored After removing the cause of the fault use the reset command to reset the drive Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 95 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 7 Motor Parameters 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered this parameter Motor Current AC Drive Current x 100 with Motor Current Motor rated current in A on type shield AC Drive Current Rated current of AC drive in A see Pr 00 01 Ea Pr 07 00 and Pr 07 01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control mode Pr 00 10 1 They also must be set if the Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Pr 06 06 or Slip Compensation Pr 07 03 functions are selected 07 00 must be greater than Pr 07 01 Motor No load Current Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100 The setting of the Motor no load current will affe
287. the drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall If the output current is lower than the setting specified in Pr 06 02 the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set frequency command value Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 91 Chapter 4 Parameters Over Current Stall Prevention during Over Current Operation output Detection frequency decrease Level 06 02 Output Current Output N Frequency over current stall prevention during operation ETE Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Settings Factory Setting 0 0 Over Torque detection disabled 1 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected stop running 3 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected stop running This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over torque OL2 is detected via the following method if the output current exceeds the over torque detection level Pr 06 04 longer than the setting of Pr 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time the warning message OL2 is displayed If a Multi functional Output Terminal is set to o
288. the AC motor drive to K3000 30 00Hz acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 63 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M1000 O0 M11 1 M10 D 64 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 6 Error Code Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Code ID Description Corrective Actions Check if the program is error and PLod 20 Data write error download the program again Power on again and download the PLSv 21 Data write error when executing program again 1 Please upload again PLdA 22 Program upload error 2 Return to the factory if it occurs continuously Check if the program is error and PLFn 23 Command error when download download program again program Pradramicapacttv exceeds Power on again and download program PLor 30 9 pacity again memory capacity PLFF 31 error when executing PLSn 32 Check sum error PLEd 33 There is no END command in the program PLCr 34 The command MC is continuous used more than nine times Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 65 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function This page intentionally left blank D 66 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix E CANopen Function The built in CANopen function is a kind of remote control Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol CANopen is a CAN based hig
289. the programmed frequency is attained 4 62 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters OM detection master Y 4Hz frequency 5 pase e coe lands desired 4 2 2 range frequency waiting me f i Na4 03 02 03 14 for f Dc braking tim during stop run stop OW OFF Time setting 2 master freq attained output signal setting 9 23 OFF ON OFF desired freq attained setting 03 zero speed indication ON OFF ON setting 19 zero speed indication ON OFF ON output timing chart of multiple function terminals when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication ETE Analog Output Signal AFM E Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency Meter 0 to Maximum Output Frequency 1 Analog Current Meter 0 to 250 of rated AC motor drive current This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0 10VDC ACM is 03 04 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20096 Factory Setting 100 En This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM When Pr 03 03 is set to 0 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 of the AC motor drive corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output Similarly if Pr 03 03 is set to 1 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to t
290. tifier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function Code Node Number Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index Broadcast messages NMT 0000 0 SYNC 0001 0x80 0x1005 0x1006 0x1007 TIME STAMP 0010 0x100 0x1012 0x1013 Point to point messages Emergency 0001 1 127 0x81 OxFF 0x1014 0x1015 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix E CANopen Function Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index TPDO1 0011 1 127 0x181 0x1FF 0 1800 RPDO1 0100 1 127 0x201 0x27F 0x1400 TPDO2 0101 1 127 0x281 Ox2FF 0x1801 RPDO2 0110 1 127 0x301 0x37F 0x1401 TPDO3 0111 1 127 0x381 Ox3FF 0 1802 RPDO3 1000 1 127 0x401 0x47F 0x1402 TPDO4 1001 1 127 0x481 Ox4FF 0x1803 RPDO4 1010 1 127 0x501 0x57F 0x1403 Default SDO tx 1011 1 127 0x581 0x5FF 0x1200 Default SDO rx 1100 1 127 0x601 0x67F 0x1200 NMT Error 1110 1 127 0x701 0x77F 0x1016 0x1017 Control E 1 4 CANopen Communication Protocol It has services as follows NMT Network Management Object SDO Service Data Object PDO Process Data Object EMCY Emergency Object E 1 4 1 NMT Network Management Object The Network Management NMT follows a Master Slave structure for executing NMT service Only one NMT master is in a network and other nodes are regarded as slaves All CANopen nodes have a present NMT state and NMT master can control the stat
291. ting 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating Ea This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur aa See list of error messages below see section 3 6 4 112 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters A Time out Detection Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 09 04 Communication Protocol Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt 2 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt 3 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt 4 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt 5 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt 6 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt 7 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt 8 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 2 gt 9 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt 10 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt 11 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt Ea 1 Control by PC or PLC VFD E can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following modes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange or RTU Remote Terminal Unit Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communi
292. tion Make necessary corrections such as change power supply system for requirement Check if there is heavy load yes with high start current in the same power system Using the different power supply for this drive and heavy load system i Check if Lv occurs when breaker and magnetic contactor is ON m Check if voltage between B1 and is greater than 200VDC for 115V 230V models 400VDC for 460V models ves Control circuit has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Yes Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 No gt Suitable power transformer capacity Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 5 Over Heat OH AC motor drive overheats Heat sink overheats b d Check if temperature of heat sink No Temperature detection malfunctions is greater than 90 C Please contact DELTA Yes Yes Is load too large 7 Reduce load No If cooling fan functions normally No gt Change cooling fan Yes Y gt lt Check if cooling fan is jammed _ Remove obstruction No Y Check if surrounding temperature No Maybe AC motor dri
293. tion 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel 1 2 oak w Brake module This function is not for VFD E T series The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel Only the same power system can be connected in parallel It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel no limit in horsepower power should be applied at the same time only the same power system can be connected in parallel Power 115 208 220 230 380 440 480 depend on models IM IM IM IM For frame A terminal is connected to the terminal of the brake module For frame B and C terminal 1 is connected to the terminal of the brake module Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeter and inch D t x i 1 i Pi llc d H H1 D j Frame w1 H H1 D o D A 72 0 2 83 60 0 2 36 142 0 5 59 120 0 4 72 152 0 5 98 5 2 0 04 7 6 0 06 B 100 0 3 94 89 0 3 50 174 0 6 86 162 0 6 38 152 0 5 98
294. tion protocol is correct VFDxxxExxC Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 5 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 2 Reset There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault 1 Press key on keypad 2 Set external terminal to RESET set one of Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 05 and then set to be ON 3 Send RESET command by communication Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition and to ensure a long life It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check up of the AC motor drive regularly Daily Inspection Basic check up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are Whether the motors are operating as expected Whether the installation environment is abnormal Whether the cooling system is operating as expected Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation Whether the motors are overheating during operation OP gw eo c Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter Periodic Inspection Before the check up always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover Wait at
295. tly i e not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other power equipment Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit In short solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of no product disconnect disturbing equipment no spread limit emission for disturbing equipment and no receive enhance immunity 5 14 Environmental Condition Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device you should comply with the environmental conditions Here are some remedial measures if necessary 1 To prevent vibration the use of anti vibration dampers is the last choice Vibrations must be within the specification Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short circuits If necessary install the AC motor drive in a dust proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations use a completely sealed enclosure The ambient temperature should be within the specification Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability For semiconductor components damage will occur once any specification is out of range Therefore it is necessary to periodically check air qualit
296. tory Setting 0 AR This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal You can activate internal terminals by Pr 04 28 A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time Ea For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 85 Chapter 4 Parameters 5 4 533 3 5 6 O external terminal Bus 222222 1 internal terminal T To en The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input For example if setting MI5 MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1 MI2 4 to be external terminals The setting value should be bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X2 1X25 1X2 1X2 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following 5 4 3 2 1 0 i Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ozexternal terminal s terminal Ea When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows Ozexternal terminal Weights 2 2 2 2 27 222 2 2 2 2 1 internal terminal Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 EE internal Terminal Status Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 This para
297. tput the vibrating pulse with cycle time A T On T Off Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The iiec circuitry of cycle time T On A T Off p The figure above uses timer TO to control coil 1 to be ON After Y1 is ON timer will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1 The oscillating circuit will be shown as above n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number T is the base of timer clock period Example 8 Blinking Circuit T2 T1 I 9 EMAIL The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms It uses two timers to control On OFF time of Y1 coil If figure n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2 T is the base of timer clock period Example 9 Triggered Circuit itt xL 1 MO Y1 eat 1 1 1 ji n Rn Y1 Y1 In figure above the rising edge differential command of XO will make coil MO to have a single pulse of AT a scan time Y1 will be ON during this scan time In the next scan time coil MO will be OFF normally close MO and normally close Y1 are all closed However coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising edge comes after input and coil MO is ON for a scan time The timing chart is as shown above This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with a
298. uency frequency motor motor speed speed Time Time stops according ta 1 freerun to stop operation decel eration time operation command RUN STOP command RUN STOP ramp to stop and free run to stop Frequency Frequency frequency output stops according to operation decel eration time operation free run to stop command command EF EF When 02 02 is set to 2 or 3 When 02 02 is set to 0 or 1 WAKE PWM Carrier Frequency Selections Unit 1 115V 230V 460V Series Power 0 25 to 15hp 0 2kW to 11kW Setting Range 1 to 15 kHz Factory Setting 8 kHz Ea This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 53 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 54 Carrier Acoustic Electromagnetic Heat Current Frequency Noise Noise or leakage pissipation Wave current 1kHz Significant Minimal Minimal AKAN Minimal 8kHz ini REST VVVV 15kHz Minimal Significant Significant Significant From the table we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise AC motor drive heat dissipation and motor acoustic noise The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s l
299. uld have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly The drawing is shown as follows XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 CO C1 I HHHH H HH H 00000 X11 X12 X13 0000 H H N Row Number The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner The output handling including the operation frame of coil and application command at the most right side in ladder diagram Take the following diagram for example we analyze the process step by step The number at the right corner is the explanation order Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The explanation of command order 1 LD 2 OR MO 3 AND X1 4 LD 1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD TO AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR TO K10 The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram 1 LD LDI command give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising edge or falling edge when contact is ON as shown in the following Rising ed ising edge Falling edge 1 4rT Time 41 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 2 ANI command singl
300. une 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 6 Remote Controller RC 01 Dimensions are in millimeter 7 1 Anetta HC 01 REV RUN JOG FWD STOP RESET Le 615 4 16 115 14 13 71 lt Rc otTerminal block LEE TE E E emm vrb E 1 0 block VFD E Programming Pr 02 00 set to 2 Pr 02 01 set to 1 external controls Pr 04 04 set to 1 setting Run Stop and Fwd Rev controls Pr 04 07 MI5 set to 5 External reset Pr 04 08 MI6 set to 8 JOG operation Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 15 Appendix B Accessories B 7 PUO6 B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD PU06 Frequency Command Status indicator Output Frequency Status indicator User Defined Units Status indicator JOG By pressing JOG key Jog frequency operation UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency Left Key Move cursor to the left FWD REV Key w RE A j Select FWD REV operation RUN 212 B 7 2 Explanation of Display Message Display Message LED Display Indicates frequency voltage current user defined units read and save etc Model Number Status Display Display the driver s current status MODE Change between different display mode PU Key Switch the
301. unication time out error of control board and power board CP10 4 18 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Group 7 Motor Parameters Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer 07 00 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 0 Motor No Load o 07 01 Current Motor 0 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 407 02 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 0 407 03 Slip Compensation 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Used without PG Motor 0 0 Disable Motor Parameters 07 04 Auto Tuning 1 Auto tuning R1 0 2 Auto tuning R1 no load test Motor Line to line 07 05 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 0 07 06 Motor Rated Slip 5 99 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 Motor 0 07 07 Slip Compensation 9 to 250 200 Limit Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 10 Constant 07 09 Slip Compensation 9 95 10 00 sec 0 20 Time Constant Accumulative Motor 07 10 Operation Time 0 to 1439 Min 0 Min Accumulative Motor 07 11 Operation Time 0 to 65535 Day 0 Day Motor PTC 0 Disable Overheat Protection 4 Enable 0 Input Debouncing 07 13 Time of the PTC 0 9999 2ms 100 Protection Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 19 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer Motor PTC 07 14 Overheat Protection Level 0 1 10 0V
302. us And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status Quick Stop 23 ONLY for It is only valid when Pr 02 01 is set to 5 in VFD E C models VFD E C models When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is Download Execute enabled it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can Monitor PLC download execute monitor PLC When this function is disabled it T Program PLC2 will display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 NOT for VECES When operation command source is external terminal the keypad models cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status Simple position This function should be used with Pr 01 20 Pr 01 25 for simple function position Refer to Pr 01 25 for details The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with Out of PLC for washing machine When this setting is enabled it will get Balance Detection value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t value Pr 08 23 Motor selection bit When this setting is enabled it can be used for motor selection 27 0 Pr 01 01 01 06 01 26 01 43 07 18 07 38 07 00 07 06 For example 1 27 MI2 28 When and MI2 are OFF it selects motor 0 gg Motor selection bit When is ON and MI2 is OFF it selects motor 1 1
303. ut Terminal MO6 RA6 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Settings 0 to 21 Factory Setting 0 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON J Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed Minimum Output Frequency i Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to Pr 06 03 4 Over Torque Detection Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B 5 during baseblock Base block be forced by Multi Indication function input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected 7 Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal Active when fault occurs oc ov oH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF 4 138 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Desired Frequency 9 Active when the desired frequency Pr 03 02 is attained Attained Terminal Count Value 10 Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value 11 Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall
304. ut using Pr 07 04 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Ea Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the following equation to calculate the rated slip Rated Slip Hz Fpase Pr 01 01 base frequency rated rpm x motor pole 120 0707 Slip Compensation Limit Unit 1 Settings 0 to 250 Factory Setting 200 E This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency the percentage of Pr 07 06 Example when Pr 07 06 5Hz and Pr 07 07 150 the upper limit of the compensation frequency is 7 5Hz Therefore for a 50Hz motor the max output is 57 5Hz 0708 Torque Compensation Time Constant Unit 0 01 Settings 0 01 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 10 07 09 Slip Compensation Time Constant Unit 0 01 Settings 0 05 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 20 Setting 07 08 Pr 07 09 changes the response time for the compensations Ea Too long time constants give slow response too short values can give unstable operation Accumulative Motor Operation Time Min Unit 1 Settings 0 1439 Factory Setting 0 07 11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time Day Unit 1 Settings 0 65535 Factory Setting 0 07 10 and Pr 07 11 used to record the motor operation time They be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded 07 12 Motor PTC Over
305. ve has malfunction or is within specification misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Yes d Adjust surrounding temperature to specification 5 6 Overload OL OL1 OL2 Y Check for correct settings at No 06 06 06 07 Modify setting Yes Is load too large No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Yes gt Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive 5 4 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 7 Keypad Display is Abnormal Abnormal display or no display Cycle power to AC motor drive Fix connector and eliminate noise Display Yes v normal he No SS correctly and Check if all connectors are connect no noise is present AC motor drive works normally p 5 8 Phase Loss PHL AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA Phase loss Check wiring at S and T terminals Ne y Yes Check if the screws of Correct wiring No terminals are tightened gt gt Tighten all screws y Yes Check if the input voltage of R S T is unbalanced Yes No v Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1
306. ve is Enabled see Pr 01 18 Ea The Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 3 4 are selected according to the Multi function Input Terminals Settings See Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for more details the diagram shown below the Acceleration Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Suppose the Maximum Output Frequency is 60 Hz Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is 1 0 Hz and Acceleration Deceleration Time is 10 seconds The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1 0Hz is in this case 9 83 seconds 60 1 10 60 9 83secs Frequency 01 00 Max output Frequency setting operation frequency 01 05 Min output frequency Decel Time Time DED CEA The definition of 1 Accel Decel Time 0 Hz Accel Time Resulting Decel Time Resulting Accel Time 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e Resulting Accel Decel Time Jog Acceleration Time Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 01 14 Jog Deceleration Time Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 45 Chapter 4 Parameters IREE Jog Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to Fmax Pr 0
307. ven though the MC MCR commands is OFF 2 MCR is the main control ending command that is placed at the end of the main control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command 3 Commands of the MC MCR main control program supports the nest program structure with 8 layers as its greatest Please use the commands in order from NO N7 and refer to the following Program Example Ladder diagram D 40 Command code Operation LD Load A contact of X0 MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact LD x1 Load A contact of X1 OUT YO Drive YO coil LD 2 Load A contact of X2 MC N1 Enable N1 common series connection contact LD X3 Load A contact of X3 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MCR 1 Disable N1 common series connection contact MCR NO Disable NO common series connection contact LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function LD X11 Load A contact of X11 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil MCR NO Disable NO common series connection contact Mnemonic Function LDP Rising edge detection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 M0O M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v v Y v Explanations Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the sam
308. ver torque detection Pr 03 00 03 01 04 the output is on Please refer to Pr 03 00 03 01 for details URIE Over Torque Detection Level OL2 Unit 1 Settings 10 to 200 Factory Setting 150 This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time OL2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 1 4 92 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This parameter sets the time for how long over torque must be detected before OL2 is displayed ETE Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection OL1 Factory Setting 2 Settings 0 Operate with a Standard Motor self cooled by fan 1 Operate with a Special Motor forced external cooling 2 Operation disabled Ea This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating 100 EJ 5 E S 100 o 80 5 60 60 o 5 40 40 8 20 5 20 2 E E 25 50 75 100 125 150 2 25 50 75 100 125 150 rated frequency of the motor rated frequency of the motor Standard motor Special Motor self cooled by fan forced external cooling 0607 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Unit 1 Settings 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting 60 Ea The parameter determines the time required for activating the t electronic thermal protection function The graph below
309. xample communication to AMD with address 16 decimal 10H ASCII mode Address 1 0 gt 1 z31H 0 30H RTU mode Address 10H 3 3 Function Function code and DATA data characters The format of data characters depends on the function code read data from register 06H write single register 08H loop detection Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 10H write multiple registers The available function codes and examples for VFD E are described as follows 1 03H multi read read data from registers Example reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H AMD address is 01H ASCII mode Command message Response message STX STX Address Address q q m Function Function g 2 Number of data 0 ZU Count by byt DU Starting data 1 Count by byte 4 address 0 q 2 Content of starting 7 address 0 2102H Number of data 0 0 count by word 0 o 2 Content of address 0 D 2103H m LRC Check 7 E END LRC Check LF BH CR END LF RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 03H Function 03H i 21H Number of data Starting data umber 04H address 02H count by byte Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 117
310. y see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 400 04 Content of Multi function Display 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E 4 2 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Send Customer 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 6 Output power factor angle n 7 Display output power P 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI I V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level 13 Display AVI4 ACIG level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M User Defined 00 05 Coefficient K 0 1 to 160 0 1 0 00 06 Power Board Read only H H Software Version 00 07 Control Board Read only T4HE Software Version 00 08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0 00 09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0 0 V f Control 00 10 Control Method 0 1 Vector Control 00 11 Reserved 50Hz Base Voltage 0 230V 400V 00 12 0 Selection 1 220V 380V Group 1 Basic Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 01 00 Maximum Output 50 00
311. y Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback 12 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVIA analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Ea Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 145 Chapter 4 Parameters AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 EXE Min AVIA Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 a Min AVI4 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 1244 Max AVIA Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 1245 Max AVIA Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 1246 Min ACI3 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 1217 Min ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 a Max ACI3 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 Max ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 4 146 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 1220 W Terminal Analog Signal Mode
312. y and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary In addition the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures making cabinet heating necessary Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 9 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 4 Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Use an air conditioner and or exsiccator 5 15 Affecting Other Machines An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons Some solutions are High Harmonics at Power Side High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by 1 Separate the power system use a transformer for AC motor drive 2 Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive 3 If phase lead capacitors are used never on the AC motor drive output use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics 3 3 3 serial reactor l T phase lead capacitor a Motor Temperature Rises When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan the cooling will be bad at low speeds causing the motor to overheat Besides high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range 1 Use a motor with independent ventilation forced external cooling or increase the motor rated power 2 Use a special inverter duty motor 8 Do NOT run a
313. y external signal more motors it can reach high speed but still start and stop smoothly 4 32 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Overheat Warning Chapter 4 Parameters General application deceleration pause Acceleration deceleration Applications Purpose Functions When AC motor drive overheats it 03 00 03 01 Air conditioner Safety measure uses a thermal sensor to have 04 05 04 08 overheat warning Two wire three wire Applications Purpose Functions ee 02 00 66 4 S FWBISTOF PLOSE FWO 02 01 REVISTOP jeo Me eP re 02 08 DCM 04 04 M aur RUN STOR eS CLOSE RUN orward an MI2 OPEN FWD General application reverse by external CLOSE REV terminals DEM 3 wire SOPIRON MI1 CLOSE RUN eT MI3 OPEN STOP 2 FWD REV FWD CLOSE REV DCM Operation Command Applications Purpose Functions Biss Selecting the Selection of AC motor drive control by 02 01 General application source of control external terminals digital keypad or 04 05 04 08 signal RS485 Frequency Hold Applications Purpose Functions B nos Acceleration Hold output frequency during 04 05 04 08 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 33 Chapter 4 Parameters Auto Restart after Fault
314. y of start When start normally open contact X1 On stop 1 2 normally contact X2 Off and Y1 On coil Y1 will START STOP Y1 be active and latching are valid at the same time if X2 On coil Y1 will be active due to latched contact Therefore it calls priority of start D 14 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 3 the latching circuit of SET and RST commands The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made Toppriority of stop X1 up of RST and SET command l set y1 X2 It is top priority of stop when RST command is set RST Y1 behind SET command When executing PLC from up to down The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same time therefore it calls Top priority of start priority of stop x2 N RST Y1 It is top priority of start when SET command is set after 1 m RST command When X1 and X2 act at the same SET Y1 time Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start a The common control circuit Example 4 condition control X1 x3 X He Y1 1 H ela a n x2 X4 Y1 Xi I 7 34 L 25 cs e Y2 x4 1 H v2 I X1 and X3 can start stop Y1 separately X2 and X4 can start stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in serie
315. ys 2 it means Relay 1 is active For Example The display value 2 bit 1 X 2 When extension card is installed the number of the multi function output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function output terminals is shown as follows O Active Weights 2 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Off Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lt Rrelay1 tmo MO2 RA2 MO3 RA3 MO4 RA4 MO5 RA5 MO6 RA6 MO7 RA7 Revision June 2008 04EE SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Cnapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters ETE X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Unit O 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 04 01 X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive Bias 1 Negative Bias 04 02 X Keypad Potentiometer Gain Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 200 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias REV Motion Enabled Example 1 Standard application This is the most used setting The user only needs to set Pr 02 00 to 04 The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer COME zone Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 Bias adjustment 30Hz Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command OHz ov 5V 10V Example 2 Use of bia

Delta Electronics AC Motor Drive VFD-E User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents